patch 8.0.1195: can't build on MS-Windows

Problem:    Can't build on MS-Windows.
Solution:   Adjust #ifdef and add #ifdefs.

.gitignore

@@ -38,6 +38,7 @@ src/pathdef.c
 src/Obj*/pathdef.c
 gvimext.dll
 gvimext.lib
+gvim.lib
 runtime/doc/uganda.nsis.txt
 
 # Borland C++

.travis.yml

@@ -1,4 +1,5 @@
 language: c
+dist: trusty
 
 os:
   - osx
@@ -20,7 +21,7 @@ env:
     "CONFOPT='--enable-perlinterp --enable-pythoninterp --enable-rubyinterp --enable-luainterp'"
     # ASAN build
   - BUILD=yes TEST=test SANITIZER_CFLAGS="-g -O1 -DABORT_ON_INTERNAL_ERROR -DEXITFREE -fsanitize=address -fno-omit-frame-pointer"
-    FEATURES=huge SRCDIR=./src CHECK_AUTOCONF=no ASAN_OPTIONS="print_stacktrace=1 log_path=asan"
+    FEATURES=huge SRCDIR=./src CHECK_AUTOCONF=no ASAN_OPTIONS="print_stacktrace=1 log_path=asan" LSAN_OPTIONS="suppressions=$TRAVIS_BUILD_DIR/src/testdir/lsan-suppress.txt"
     "CONFOPT='--enable-perlinterp --enable-pythoninterp --enable-rubyinterp --enable-luainterp'"
 
 sudo: false
@@ -41,12 +42,12 @@ matrix:
             "CONFOPT='--enable-perlinterp --enable-pythoninterp --enable-python3interp --enable-rubyinterp --enable-luainterp'"
     - os: osx
       env: BUILD=yes TEST=test SANITIZER_CFLAGS="-g -O1 -DABORT_ON_INTERNAL_ERROR -DEXITFREE -fsanitize=address -fno-omit-frame-pointer"
-            FEATURES=huge SRCDIR=./src CHECK_AUTOCONF=no ASAN_OPTIONS="print_stacktrace=1 log_path=asan"
+            FEATURES=huge SRCDIR=./src CHECK_AUTOCONF=no ASAN_OPTIONS="print_stacktrace=1 log_path=asan" LSAN_OPTIONS="suppressions=$TRAVIS_BUILD_DIR/src/testdir/lsan-suppress.txt"
             "CONFOPT='--enable-perlinterp --enable-pythoninterp --enable-rubyinterp --enable-luainterp'"
     - os: linux
-      compiler: gcc
+      compiler: clang
       env: BUILD=yes TEST=test SANITIZER_CFLAGS="-g -O1 -DABORT_ON_INTERNAL_ERROR -DEXITFREE -fsanitize=address -fno-omit-frame-pointer"
-            FEATURES=huge SRCDIR=./src CHECK_AUTOCONF=no ASAN_OPTIONS="print_stacktrace=1 log_path=asan"
+            FEATURES=huge SRCDIR=./src CHECK_AUTOCONF=no ASAN_OPTIONS="print_stacktrace=1 log_path=asan" LSAN_OPTIONS="suppressions=$TRAVIS_BUILD_DIR/src/testdir/lsan-suppress.txt"
             "CONFOPT='--enable-perlinterp --enable-pythoninterp --enable-rubyinterp --enable-luainterp'"
     - os: linux
       compiler: clang
@@ -70,17 +71,25 @@ addons:
       - libperl-dev
       - python-dev
       - python3-dev
-      - liblua5.1-0-dev
+      - liblua5.2-dev
-      - lua5.1
+      - lua5.2
+      - ruby-dev
       - cscope
+      - libgtk2.0-dev
 
 before_install:
+  - rvm reset
+    # Remove /opt/python/3.x.x/bin from $PATH for using system python3.
+    # ("pyenv global system" doesn't seem to work.)
+  - if [ "$TRAVIS_OS_NAME" = "linux" ] && which python3 | grep '/opt/python/' > /dev/null; then export PATH=$(echo $PATH | sed -e "s#$(echo $(which python3) | sed -e 's#/python3$##'):##"); fi
   - if [ "$COVERAGE" = "yes" ]; then pip install --user cpp-coveralls; fi
     # needed for https support for coveralls
     # building cffi only works with gcc, not with clang
   - if [ "$COVERAGE" = "yes" ]; then CC=gcc pip install --user pyopenssl ndg-httpsclient pyasn1; fi
     # Lua is not installed on Travis OSX
-  - if [ "$TRAVIS_OS_NAME" = "osx" ]; then brew install lua; export LUA_PREFIX=/usr/local; fi
+  - if [ "$TRAVIS_OS_NAME" = "osx" ]; then export HOMEBREW_NO_AUTO_UPDATE=1; brew update; brew install lua; export LUA_PREFIX=/usr/local; fi
+    # Use llvm-cov instead of gcov when compiler is clang.
+  - if [ "$TRAVIS_OS_NAME" = "linux" ] && [ "$CC" = "clang" ]; then ln -sf $(which llvm-cov) /home/travis/bin/gcov; fi
 
 # Start virtual framebuffer to be able to test the GUI. Does not work on OS X.
 before_script:
@@ -91,7 +100,8 @@ script:
   - if [ "$CHECK_AUTOCONF" = "yes" -a "$CC" = "gcc" ]; then make -C src autoconf; fi
   - if [ "x$SHADOWOPT" != x ]; then make -C src shadow; fi
   - (cd ${SRCDIR} && ./configure --with-features=$FEATURES $CONFOPT --enable-fail-if-missing && if [ "$BUILD" = "yes" ]; then make -j$NPROC; fi)
-  - if [ "$BUILD" = "yes" ]; then ${SRCDIR}/vim --version; fi
+    # Show Vim version and also if_xx versions.
+  - if [ "$BUILD" = "yes" ]; then ${SRCDIR}/vim --version; ${SRCDIR}/vim --not-a-term -u NONE -S ${SRCDIR}/testdir/if_ver-1.vim -c quit > /dev/null; ${SRCDIR}/vim --not-a-term -u NONE -S ${SRCDIR}/testdir/if_ver-2.vim -c quit > /dev/null; cat if_ver.txt; fi
   - if [ -n "$ASAN_OPTIONS" ]; then export PATH=/usr/lib/llvm-$(clang -v 2>&1 | sed -n 's/.*version \([1-9]\.[0-9][0-9]*\).*/\1/p')/bin:$PATH; fi
   - make $SHADOWOPT $TEST
   - if [ -n "$ASAN_OPTIONS" ]; then for log in $(find -type f -name 'asan.*' -size +0); do cat "$log"; err=1; done; fi

Filelist

@@ -85,6 +85,7 @@ SRC_ALL =	\
 		src/syntax.c \
 		src/tag.c \
 		src/term.c \
+		src/terminal.c \
 		src/term.h \
 		src/termlib.c \
 		src/ui.c \
@@ -104,6 +105,7 @@ SRC_ALL =	\
 		src/testdir/Make_all.mak \
 		src/testdir/*.in \
 		src/testdir/*.py \
+		src/testdir/lsan-suppress.txt \
 		src/testdir/sautest/autoload/*.vim \
 		src/testdir/runtest.vim \
 		src/testdir/shared.vim \
@@ -133,6 +135,8 @@ SRC_ALL =	\
 		src/testdir/bench*.in \
 		src/testdir/bench*.vim \
 		src/testdir/samples/*.txt \
+		src/testdir/if_ver*.vim \
+		src/testdir/xterm_ramp.vim \
 		src/proto.h \
 		src/proto/arabic.pro \
 		src/proto/blowfish.pro \
@@ -187,6 +191,7 @@ SRC_ALL =	\
 		src/proto/syntax.pro \
 		src/proto/tag.pro \
 		src/proto/term.pro \
+		src/proto/terminal.pro \
 		src/proto/termlib.pro \
 		src/proto/ui.pro \
 		src/proto/undo.pro \
@@ -194,6 +199,76 @@ SRC_ALL =	\
 		src/proto/version.pro \
 		src/proto/winclip.pro \
 		src/proto/window.pro \
+		src/libvterm/.bzrignore \
+		src/libvterm/.gitignore \
+		src/libvterm/LICENSE \
+		src/libvterm/Makefile \
+		src/libvterm/README \
+		src/libvterm/tbl2inc_c.pl \
+		src/libvterm/vterm.pc.in \
+		src/libvterm/bin/unterm.c \
+		src/libvterm/bin/vterm-ctrl.c \
+		src/libvterm/bin/vterm-dump.c \
+		src/libvterm/doc/URLs \
+		src/libvterm/doc/seqs.txt \
+		src/libvterm/include/vterm.h \
+		src/libvterm/include/vterm_keycodes.h \
+		src/libvterm/src/encoding.c \
+		src/libvterm/src/encoding/DECdrawing.inc \
+		src/libvterm/src/encoding/DECdrawing.tbl \
+		src/libvterm/src/encoding/uk.inc \
+		src/libvterm/src/encoding/uk.tbl \
+		src/libvterm/src/keyboard.c \
+		src/libvterm/src/mouse.c \
+		src/libvterm/src/parser.c \
+		src/libvterm/src/pen.c \
+		src/libvterm/src/rect.h \
+		src/libvterm/src/screen.c \
+		src/libvterm/src/state.c \
+		src/libvterm/src/unicode.c \
+		src/libvterm/src/utf8.h \
+		src/libvterm/src/vterm.c \
+		src/libvterm/src/vterm_internal.h \
+		src/libvterm/t/02parser.test \
+		src/libvterm/t/03encoding_utf8.test \
+		src/libvterm/t/10state_putglyph.test \
+		src/libvterm/t/11state_movecursor.test \
+		src/libvterm/t/12state_scroll.test \
+		src/libvterm/t/13state_edit.test \
+		src/libvterm/t/14state_encoding.test \
+		src/libvterm/t/15state_mode.test \
+		src/libvterm/t/16state_resize.test \
+		src/libvterm/t/17state_mouse.test \
+		src/libvterm/t/18state_termprops.test \
+		src/libvterm/t/20state_wrapping.test \
+		src/libvterm/t/21state_tabstops.test \
+		src/libvterm/t/22state_save.test \
+		src/libvterm/t/25state_input.test \
+		src/libvterm/t/26state_query.test \
+		src/libvterm/t/27state_reset.test \
+		src/libvterm/t/28state_dbl_wh.test \
+		src/libvterm/t/29state_fallback.test \
+		src/libvterm/t/30pen.test \
+		src/libvterm/t/40screen_ascii.test \
+		src/libvterm/t/41screen_unicode.test \
+		src/libvterm/t/42screen_damage.test \
+		src/libvterm/t/43screen_resize.test \
+		src/libvterm/t/44screen_pen.test \
+		src/libvterm/t/45screen_protect.test \
+		src/libvterm/t/46screen_extent.test \
+		src/libvterm/t/47screen_dbl_wh.test \
+		src/libvterm/t/48screen_termprops.test \
+		src/libvterm/t/90vttest_01-movement-1.test \
+		src/libvterm/t/90vttest_01-movement-2.test \
+		src/libvterm/t/90vttest_01-movement-3.test \
+		src/libvterm/t/90vttest_01-movement-4.test \
+		src/libvterm/t/90vttest_02-screen-1.test \
+		src/libvterm/t/90vttest_02-screen-2.test \
+		src/libvterm/t/90vttest_02-screen-3.test \
+		src/libvterm/t/90vttest_02-screen-4.test \
+		src/libvterm/t/92lp1640917.test \
+		src/libvterm/t/harness.c \
+		src/libvterm/t/run-test.pl \
 
 
 # source files for Unix only
@@ -331,6 +406,7 @@ SRC_DOS =	\
 		src/msvcsetup.bat \
 		src/msvc2008.bat \
 		src/msvc2010.bat \
+		src/msvc2015.bat \
 		src/dimm.idl \
 		src/dlldata.c \
 		src/dosinst.c \
@@ -564,6 +640,7 @@ RT_ALL =	\
 		runtime/pack/dist/opt/matchit/doc/tags \
 		runtime/pack/dist/opt/shellmenu/plugin/shellmenu.vim \
 		runtime/pack/dist/opt/swapmouse/plugin/swapmouse.vim \
+		runtime/pack/dist/opt/termdebug/plugin/termdebug.vim \
 
 # runtime files for all distributions without CR-NL translation
 RT_ALL_BIN =	\

Makefile

@@ -120,28 +120,27 @@ MINOR = 0
 #
 # MS-Windows:
 # - Run make on Unix to update the ".mo" files.
-# - Get libintl-8.dll, libiconv-2.dll and libgcc_s_sjlj-1.dll. E.g. from
+# - Get 32 bit libintl-8.dll, libiconv-2.dll and libgcc_s_sjlj-1.dll. E.g. from
 #   https://mlocati.github.io/gettext-iconv-windows/ .
 #   Use the "shared-32.zip file and extract the archive to get the files.
-#   Put them in the top directory, "make dosrt" uses them.
+#   Put them in the gettext32 directory, "make dosrt" uses them.
+# - Get 64 bit libintl-8.dll and libiconv-2.dll. E.g. from
+#   https://mlocati.github.io/gettext-iconv-windows/ .
+#   Use the "shared-64.zip file and extract the archive to get the files.
+#   Put them in the gettext64 directory, "make dosrt" uses them.
 # - > make dossrc
 #   > make dosrt
 #   Unpack dist/vim##rt.zip and dist/vim##src.zip on an MS-Windows PC.
 # Win32 console version build:
-# - Set environment for Visual C++ 2008, e.g.:
+# - See src/INSTALLpc.txt for installing the compiler and SDK.
-#   > src/msvc2008.bat
+# - Set environment for Visual C++ 2015:
-#   Or: 
+#   > cd src
-#   > C:\Program Files (x86)\Microsoft Visual Studio 9.0\VC\bin\vcvars32.bat
+#   > msvc2015.bat
-#   Or, when using the Visual C++ Toolkit 2003: "msvcsetup.bat" (adjust the
+# - Build the console binary:
-#   paths when necessary).
-#   For Windows 98/ME the 2003 version is required, but then the executable
-#   won't work on Windows 7 and 64 bit systems.
-# - > cd src
 #   > nmake -f Make_mvc.mak
-# - Run the tests:
+# - Run the tests and check the ouput:
 #   > nmake -f Make_mvc.mak testclean
 #   > nmake -f Make_mvc.mak test
-#   - check the output.
 # - Rename (using ../tools/rename.bat):
 #           vim.exe to vimw32.exe
 #           tee/tee.exe to teew32.exe
@@ -152,19 +151,18 @@ MINOR = 0
 # Win32 GUI version build:
 # - > cd src
 #   > nmake -f Make_mvc.mak GUI=yes
-# - Run the tests:
+# - Run the tests and check the output:
 #   > nmake -f Make_mvc.mak testclean
 #   > nmake -f Make_mvc.mak testgvim
-#   - check the output.
 # - move "gvim.exe" to here (otherwise the OLE version will overwrite it).
 # - Move gvim.pdb to here.
 # - Copy "GvimExt/gvimext.dll" to here.
 # - Delete vimrun.exe, install.exe and uninstal.exe.
 # Win32 GUI version with OLE, PERL, Ruby, TCL, PYTHON and dynamic IME:
 # - Install the interfaces you want, see src/INSTALLpc.txt
+#   Adjust bigvim.bat to match the version of each interface you want.
 # - Build:
 #   > cd src
-#   Adjust bigvim.bat to match the version of each interface you want.
 #   > bigvim.bat
 # - Run the tests:
 #   > nmake -f Make_mvc.mak testclean
@@ -191,7 +189,7 @@ MINOR = 0
 #   gvimext64.dll can be obtained from http://code.google.com/p/vim-win3264/
 #	It is part of vim72.zip as vim72/gvimext.dll.
 # - Make sure there is a diff.exe two levels up (get it from a previous Vim
-#   version).
+#   version).  Also put winpty32.dll and winpty-agent.exe there.
 # - go to ../nsis and do:
 #   > makensis gvim.nsi  (takes a few minutes).
 #      ignore warning for libwinpthread-1.dll
@@ -467,9 +465,13 @@ dosrt_files: dist prepare no_title.vim
 		cp $$i dist/vim/$(VIMRTDIR)/lang/$$n/LC_MESSAGES/vim.mo; \
 	      fi \
 	    done
-	cp libintl-8.dll dist/vim/$(VIMRTDIR)/
+	mkdir dist/vim/$(VIMRTDIR)/gettext32
-	cp libiconv-2.dll dist/vim/$(VIMRTDIR)/
+	cp gettext32/libintl-8.dll dist/vim/$(VIMRTDIR)/gettext32/
-	cp libgcc_s_sjlj-1.dll dist/vim/$(VIMRTDIR)/
+	cp gettext32/libiconv-2.dll dist/vim/$(VIMRTDIR)/gettext32/
+	cp gettext32/libgcc_s_sjlj-1.dll dist/vim/$(VIMRTDIR)/gettext32/
+	mkdir dist/vim/$(VIMRTDIR)/gettext64
+	cp gettext64/libintl-8.dll dist/vim/$(VIMRTDIR)/gettext64/
+	cp gettext64/libiconv-2.dll dist/vim/$(VIMRTDIR)/gettext64/
 
 
 # Used before uploading.  Don't delete the AAPDIR/sign files!
@@ -496,7 +498,10 @@ dosbin_gvim: dist no_title.vim dist/$(COMMENT_GVIM)
 	cp vimrun.exe dist/vim/$(VIMRTDIR)/vimrun.exe
 	cp installw32.exe dist/vim/$(VIMRTDIR)/install.exe
 	cp uninstalw32.exe dist/vim/$(VIMRTDIR)/uninstal.exe
-	cp gvimext.dll dist/vim/$(VIMRTDIR)/gvimext.dll
+	mkdir dist/vim/$(VIMRTDIR)/GvimExt32
+	cp gvimext.dll dist/vim/$(VIMRTDIR)/GvimExt32/gvimext.dll
+	mkdir dist/vim/$(VIMRTDIR)/GvimExt64
+	cp gvimext64.dll dist/vim/$(VIMRTDIR)/GvimExt64/gvimext.dll
 	cd dist && zip -9 -rD -z gvim$(VERSION).zip vim <$(COMMENT_GVIM)
 	cp gvim.pdb dist/gvim$(VERSION).pdb
 

nsis/README.txt

@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 This builds a one-click install for Vim for Win32 using the Nullsoft
-Installation System (NSIS), available at http://www.nullsoft.com/free/nsis/
+Installation System (NSIS), available at http://nsis.sourceforge.net/
 
 To build the installable .exe:
 
@@ -17,8 +17,14 @@ To build the installable .exe:
 	uninstal.exe,
 	xxd/xxd.exe,
 
+    Then execute tools/rename.bat to rename the executables. (mv command is
+    required.)
+
 3.  Go to the GvimExt directory and build gvimext.dll (or get it from a binary
-    archive).
+    archive).  Both 64- and 32-bit versions are needed and should be placed
+    as follows:
+	64-bit: src/GvimExt/gvimext64.dll
+	32-bit: src/GvimExt/gvimext.dll
 
 4.  Go to the VisVim directory and build VisVim.dll (or get it from a binary
     archive).
@@ -27,13 +33,35 @@ To build the installable .exe:
     get them from a binary archive).
 
 6.  Get a "diff.exe" program and put it in the "../.." directory (above the
-    "vim61" directory, it's the same for all Vim versions).
+    "vim80" directory, it's the same for all Vim versions).
     You can find one in previous Vim versions or in this archive:
 		http://www.mossbayeng.com/~ron/vim/diffutils.tar.gz
+    Also put winpty32.dll and winpty-agent.exe there.
 
 7.  Do "make uganda.nsis.txt" in runtime/doc.  This requires sed, you may have
     to do this on Unix.  Make sure the file is in DOS file format!
 
+8.  Get gettext and iconv DLLs from the following site:
+	https://github.com/mlocati/gettext-iconv-windows/releases
+    Both 64- and 32-bit versions are needed.
+    Download the files gettextX.X.X.X-iconvX.XX-shared-{32,64}.zip, extract
+    DLLs and place them as follows:
+
+	<GETTEXT directory>
+	    |
+	    + gettext32/
+	    |	libintl-8.dll
+	    |	libiconv-2.dll
+	    |	libgcc_s_sjlj-1.dll
+	    |
+	    ` gettext64/
+		libintl-8.dll
+		libiconv-2.dll
+
+    The default <GETTEXT directory> is "..", however, you can change it by
+    passing /DGETTEXT=... option to the makensis command.
+
+
 Install NSIS if you didn't do that already.
 Also install UPX, if you want a compressed file.
 

nsis/gvim.nsi

@@ -20,8 +20,15 @@
   !define VIMTOOLS ..\..
 !endif
 
+# Location of gettext.
+# It must contain two directories: gettext32 and gettext64.
+# See README.txt for detail.
+!ifndef GETTEXT
+  !define GETTEXT ${VIMRT}
+!endif
+
 # Comment the next line if you don't have UPX.
-# Get it at http://upx.sourceforge.net
+# Get it at https://upx.github.io/
 !define HAVE_UPX
 
 # comment the next line if you do not want to add Native Language Support
@@ -87,6 +94,7 @@ UninstPage instfiles
 Function .onInit
   MessageBox MB_YESNO|MB_ICONQUESTION \
 	"This will install Vim ${VER_MAJOR}.${VER_MINOR} on your computer.$\n Continue?" \
+	/SD IDYES \
 	IDYES NoAbort
 	    Abort ; causes installer to quit.
 	NoAbort:
@@ -178,7 +186,7 @@ FunctionEnd
 
 ##########################################################
 Section "Vim executables and runtime files"
-	SectionIn 1 2 3
+	SectionIn 1 2 3 RO
 
 	# we need also this here if the user changes the instdir
 	StrCpy $0 "$INSTDIR\vim${VER_MAJOR}${VER_MINOR}"
@@ -190,13 +198,16 @@ Section "Vim executables and runtime files"
 	File ${VIMSRC}\vimrun.exe
 	File /oname=tee.exe ${VIMSRC}\teew32.exe
 	File /oname=xxd.exe ${VIMSRC}\xxdw32.exe
-	File ${VIMTOOLS}\diff.exe
 	File ${VIMRT}\vimtutor.bat
 	File ${VIMRT}\README.txt
 	File ..\uninstal.txt
 	File ${VIMRT}\*.vim
 	File ${VIMRT}\rgb.txt
 
+	File ${VIMTOOLS}\diff.exe
+	File ${VIMTOOLS}\winpty32.dll
+	File ${VIMTOOLS}\winpty-agent.exe
+
 	SetOutPath $0\colors
 	File ${VIMRT}\colors\*.*
 
@@ -215,6 +226,14 @@ Section "Vim executables and runtime files"
 
 	SetOutPath $0\macros
 	File ${VIMRT}\macros\*.*
+	SetOutPath $0\macros\hanoi
+	File ${VIMRT}\macros\hanoi\*.*
+	SetOutPath $0\macros\life
+	File ${VIMRT}\macros\life\*.*
+	SetOutPath $0\macros\maze
+	File ${VIMRT}\macros\maze\*.*
+	SetOutPath $0\macros\urm
+	File ${VIMRT}\macros\urm\*.*
 
 	SetOutPath $0\pack\dist\opt\dvorak\dvorak
 	File ${VIMRT}\pack\dist\opt\dvorak\dvorak\*.*
@@ -316,24 +335,67 @@ Section "Add an Edit-with-Vim context menu entry"
 	SetOutPath $0
 	ClearErrors
 	SetOverwrite try
+
 	${If} ${RunningX64}
+	  # Install 64-bit gvimext.dll into the GvimExt64 directory.
+	  SetOutPath $0\GvimExt64
+	  ClearErrors
 	  File /oname=gvimext.dll ${VIMSRC}\GvimExt\gvimext64.dll
-	${Else}
+!ifdef HAVE_NLS
-	  File /oname=gvimext.dll ${VIMSRC}\GvimExt\gvimext.dll
+	  File ${GETTEXT}\gettext64\libintl-8.dll
+	  File ${GETTEXT}\gettext64\libiconv-2.dll
+!endif
+
+	  IfErrors 0 GvimExt64Done
+
+	  # Can't copy gvimext.dll, create it under another name and rename it
+	  # on next reboot.
+	  GetTempFileName $3 $0\GvimExt64
+	  File /oname=$3 ${VIMSRC}\GvimExt64\gvimext.dll
+	  Rename /REBOOTOK $3 $0\GvimExt64\gvimext.dll
+!ifdef HAVE_NLS
+	  GetTempFileName $3 $0\GvimExt64
+	  File /oname=$3 ${GETTEXT}\gettext64\libintl-8.dll
+	  Rename /REBOOTOK $3 $0\GvimExt64\libintl-8.dll
+	  GetTempFileName $3 $0\GvimExt64
+	  File /oname=$3 ${GETTEXT}\gettext64\libiconv-2.dll
+	  Rename /REBOOTOK $3 $0\GvimExt64\libiconv-2.dll
+!endif
 	${EndIf}
-	IfErrors 0 GvimExtDone
+
+	GvimExt64Done:
+
+	# Install 32-bit gvimext.dll into the GvimExt32 directory.
+	SetOutPath $0\GvimExt32
+	ClearErrors
+
+	File /oname=gvimext.dll ${VIMSRC}\GvimExt\gvimext.dll
+!ifdef HAVE_NLS
+	File ${GETTEXT}\gettext32\libintl-8.dll
+	File ${GETTEXT}\gettext32\libiconv-2.dll
+	File ${GETTEXT}\gettext32\libgcc_s_sjlj-1.dll
+!endif
+
+	IfErrors 0 GvimExt32Done
 
 	# Can't copy gvimext.dll, create it under another name and rename it on
 	# next reboot.
-	GetTempFileName $3 $0
+	GetTempFileName $3 $0\GvimExt32
-	${If} ${RunningX64}
+	File /oname=$3 ${VIMSRC}\GvimExt\gvimext.dll
-	  File /oname=$3 ${VIMSRC}\GvimExt\gvimext64.dll
+	Rename /REBOOTOK $3 $0\GvimExt32\gvimext.dll
-	${Else}
+!ifdef HAVE_NLS
-	  File /oname=$3 ${VIMSRC}\GvimExt\gvimext.dll
+	GetTempFileName $3 $0\GvimExt32
-	${EndIf}
+	File /oname=$3 ${GETTEXT}\gettext32\libintl-8.dll
-	Rename /REBOOTOK $3 $0\gvimext.dll
+	Rename /REBOOTOK $3 $0\GvimExt32\libintl-8.dll
+	GetTempFileName $3 $0\GvimExt32
+	File /oname=$3 ${GETTEXT}\gettext32\libiconv-2.dll
+	Rename /REBOOTOK $3 $0\GvimExt32\libiconv-2.dll
+	GetTempFileName $3 $0\GvimExt32
+	File /oname=$3 ${GETTEXT}\gettext32\libgcc_s_sjlj-1.dll
+	Rename /REBOOTOK $3 $0\GvimExt32\libgcc_s_sjlj-1.dll
+!endif
 
-	GvimExtDone:
+	GvimExt32Done:
 	SetOverwrite lastused
 
 	# We don't have a separate entry for the "Open With..." menu, assume
@@ -382,10 +444,10 @@ SectionEnd
 		File ${VIMRT}\keymap\README.txt
 		File ${VIMRT}\keymap\*.vim
 		SetOutPath $0
-		File ${VIMRT}\libintl-8.dll
+		File ${GETTEXT}\gettext32\libintl-8.dll
-		File ${VIMRT}\libiconv-2.dll
+		File ${GETTEXT}\gettext32\libiconv-2.dll
-		File /nonfatal ${VIMRT}\libwinpthread-1.dll
+		#File /nonfatal ${VIMRT}\libwinpthread-1.dll
-		File /nonfatal ${VIMRT}\libgcc_s_sjlj-1.dll
+		File /nonfatal ${GETTEXT}\gettext32\libgcc_s_sjlj-1.dll
 	SectionEnd
 !endif
 
@@ -425,6 +487,11 @@ Section Uninstall
 	   $\nIt contains the Vim executables and runtime files." IDNO NoRemoveExes
 
 	Delete /REBOOTOK $0\*.dll
+	Delete /REBOOTOK $0\GvimExt32\*.dll
+	${If} ${RunningX64}
+	  Delete /REBOOTOK $0\GvimExt64\*.dll
+	${EndIf}
+
 	ClearErrors
 	# Remove everything but *.dll files.  Avoids that
 	# a lot remains when gvimext.dll cannot be deleted.

runtime/autoload/paste.vim

@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 " Vim support file to help with paste mappings and menus
 " Maintainer:	Bram Moolenaar <Bram@vim.org>
-" Last Change:	2006 Jun 23
+" Last Change:	2017 Aug 30
 
 " Define the string to use for items that are present both in Edit, Popup and
 " Toolbar menu.  Also used in mswin.vim and macmap.vim.
@@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
 if has("virtualedit")
   let paste#paste_cmd = {'n': ":call paste#Paste()<CR>"}
   let paste#paste_cmd['v'] = '"-c<Esc>' . paste#paste_cmd['n']
-  let paste#paste_cmd['i'] = 'x<BS><Esc>' . paste#paste_cmd['n'] . 'gi'
+  let paste#paste_cmd['i'] = "\<c-\>\<c-o>\"+gP"
 
   func! paste#Paste()
     let ove = &ve

runtime/defaults.vim

@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
 " The default vimrc file.
 "
 " Maintainer:	Bram Moolenaar <Bram@vim.org>
-" Last change:	2017 Apr 12
+" Last change:	2017 Jun 13
 "
 " This is loaded if no vimrc file was found.
 " Except when Vim is run with "-u NONE" or "-C".
@@ -106,12 +106,13 @@ if has("autocmd")
     au!
 
     " When editing a file, always jump to the last known cursor position.
-    " Don't do it when the position is invalid or when inside an event handler
+    " Don't do it when the position is invalid, when inside an event handler
-    " (happens when dropping a file on gvim).
+    " (happens when dropping a file on gvim) and for a commit message (it's
+    " likely a different one than last time).
     autocmd BufReadPost *
-      \ if line("'\"") >= 1 && line("'\"") <= line("$") |
+      \ if line("'\"") >= 1 && line("'\"") <= line("$") && &ft !~# 'commit'
-      \   exe "normal! g`\"" |
+      \ |   exe "normal! g`\""
-      \ endif
+      \ | endif
 
   augroup END
 

runtime/doc/Makefile

@@ -101,6 +101,7 @@ DOCS = \
 	tabpage.txt \
 	tagsrch.txt \
 	term.txt \
+	terminal.txt \
 	tips.txt \
 	todo.txt \
 	uganda.txt \
@@ -236,6 +237,7 @@ HTMLS = \
 	tabpage.html \
 	tagsrch.html \
 	term.html \
+	terminal.html \
 	tips.html \
 	todo.html \
 	uganda.html \

runtime/doc/autocmd.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*autocmd.txt*   For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2017 Apr 07
+*autocmd.txt*   For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2017 Jul 14
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -651,7 +651,8 @@ FileType			When the 'filetype' option has been set.  The
 				pattern is matched against the filetype.
 				<afile> can be used for the name of the file
 				where this option was set, and <amatch> for
-				the new value of 'filetype'.
+				the new value of 'filetype'.  Navigating to
+				another window or buffer is not allowed.
 				See |filetypes|.
 							*FileWriteCmd*
 FileWriteCmd			Before writing to a file, when not writing the

runtime/doc/channel.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*channel.txt*      For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2016 Dec 02
+*channel.txt*      For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2017 Aug 11
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL	  by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -427,8 +427,8 @@ When no message was available then the result is v:none for a JSON or JS mode
 channels, an empty string for a RAW or NL channel.  You can use |ch_canread()|
 to check if there is something to read.
 
-Note that when there is no callback message are dropped.  To avoid that add a
+Note that when there is no callback, messages are dropped.  To avoid that add
-close callback to the channel.
+a close callback to the channel.
 
 To read all output from a RAW channel that is available: >
 	let output = ch_readraw(channel)
@@ -489,6 +489,11 @@ If you want to handle both stderr and stdout with one handler use the
 "callback" option: >
     let job = job_start(command, {"callback": "MyHandler"}) 
 
+Depending on the system, starting a job can put Vim in the background, the
+started job gets the focus.  To avoid that, use the `foreground()` function.
+This might not always work when called early, put in the callback handler or
+use a timer to call it after the job has started.
+
 You can send a message to the command with ch_evalraw().  If the channel is in
 JSON or JS mode you can use ch_evalexpr().
 
@@ -513,7 +518,7 @@ By default this reads the whole buffer.  This can be changed with the "in_top"
 and "in_bot" options.
 
 A special mode is when "in_top" is set to zero and "in_bot" is not set: Every
-time a line is added to the buffer, the last-but-one line will be send to the
+time a line is added to the buffer, the last-but-one line will be sent to the
 job stdin.  This allows for editing the last line and sending it when pressing
 Enter.
 							*channel-close-in*
@@ -606,7 +611,7 @@ See |job_setoptions()| and |ch_setoptions()|.
 "close_cb": handler	Callback for when the channel is closed.  Same as
 			"close_cb" on |ch_open()|, see |close_cb|.
 						*job-drop*
-"drop"			Specifies when to drop messages.  Same as "drop" on
+"drop": when		Specifies when to drop messages.  Same as "drop" on
 			|ch_open()|, see |channel-drop|.  For "auto" the
 			exit_cb is not considered.
 						*job-exit_cb*
@@ -619,12 +624,12 @@ See |job_setoptions()| and |ch_setoptions()|.
 			Note that data can be buffered, callbacks may still be
 			called after the process ends.
 							*job-timeout*
-"timeout"		The time to wait for a request when blocking, E.g.
+"timeout": time		The time to wait for a request when blocking, E.g.
 			when using ch_evalexpr().  In milliseconds.  The
 			default is 2000 (2 seconds).
 						*out_timeout* *err_timeout*
-"out_timeout"		Timeout for stdout.  Only when using pipes.
+"out_timeout": time	Timeout for stdout.  Only when using pipes.
-"err_timeout"		Timeout for stderr.  Only when using pipes.
+"err_timeout": time	Timeout for stderr.  Only when using pipes.
 			Note: when setting "timeout" the part specific mode is
 			overwritten.  Therefore set "timeout" first and the
 			part specific mode later.
@@ -636,8 +641,9 @@ See |job_setoptions()| and |ch_setoptions()|.
 			The default is "term".
 
 						*job-term*
-"term": "open"		Start a terminal and connect the job
+"term": "open"		Start a terminal in a new window and connect the job
-			stdin/stdout/stderr to it.
+			stdin/stdout/stderr to it.  Similar to using
+			`:terminal`.
 			NOTE: Not implemented yet!
 
 "channel": {channel}	Use an existing channel instead of creating a new one.
@@ -647,6 +653,11 @@ See |job_setoptions()| and |ch_setoptions()|.
 			cause I/O errors.
 			Existing callbacks and other settings remain.
 
+"pty": 1		Use a pty (pseudo-tty) instead of a pipe when
+			possible.  This is most useful in combination with a
+			terminal window, see |terminal|.
+			{only on Unix and Unix-like systems}
+
 				*job-in_io* *in_top* *in_bot* *in_name* *in_buf*
 "in_io": "null"		disconnect stdin (read from /dev/null)
 "in_io": "pipe"		stdin is connected to the channel (default)
@@ -685,6 +696,10 @@ See |job_setoptions()| and |ch_setoptions()|.
 "block_write": number	only for testing: pretend every other write to stdin
 			will block
 
+"env": dict		environment variables for the new process
+"cwd": "/path/to/dir"	current working directory for the new process;
+			if the directory does not exist an error is given
+
 
 Writing to a buffer ~
 							*out_io-buffer*
@@ -720,10 +735,6 @@ The "out_msg" option can be used to specify whether a new buffer will have the
 first line set to "Reading from channel output...".  The default is to add the
 message.  "err_msg" does the same for channel error.
 
-'modifiable' option off, or write to a buffer that has 'modifiable' off.  That
-means that lines will be appended to the buffer, but the user can't easily
-change the buffer.
-
 When an existing buffer is to be written where 'modifiable' is off and the
 "out_modifiable" or "err_modifiable" options is not zero, an error is given
 and the buffer will not be written to.

runtime/doc/cmdline.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*cmdline.txt*   For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2016 Sep 27
+*cmdline.txt*   For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2017 Sep 17
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -455,6 +455,9 @@ matches exactly one character.
 
 The 'wildignorecase' option can be set to ignore case in filenames.
 
+The 'wildmenu' option can be set to show the matches just above the command
+line.
+
 If you like tcsh's autolist completion, you can use this mapping:
 	:cnoremap X <C-L><C-D>
 (Where X is the command key to use, <C-L> is CTRL-L and <C-D> is CTRL-D)
@@ -823,10 +826,16 @@ Also see |`=|.
 			       *:<cword>* *:<cWORD>* *:<cfile>* *<cfile>*
 			       *:<sfile>* *<sfile>* *:<afile>* *<afile>*
 			       *:<abuf>* *<abuf>* *:<amatch>* *<amatch>*
+			       *:<cexpr>* *<cexpr>*
 			       *<slnum>* *E495* *E496* *E497* *E499* *E500*
 Note: these are typed literally, they are not special keys!
 	<cword>    is replaced with the word under the cursor (like |star|)
 	<cWORD>    is replaced with the WORD under the cursor (see |WORD|)
+	<cexpr>    is replaced with the word under the cursor, including more
+		   to form a C expression.  E.g., when the cursor is on "arg"
+		   of "ptr->arg" then the result is "ptr->arg"; when the
+		   cursor is on "]" of "list[idx]" then the result is
+		   "list[idx]".  This is used for |v:beval_text|.
 	<cfile>    is replaced with the path name under the cursor (like what
 		   |gf| uses)
 	<afile>    When executing autocommands, is replaced with the file name

runtime/doc/debug.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*debug.txt*     For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2012 Feb 11
+*debug.txt*     For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2017 Jul 15
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ Use this command to start Vim:
 	valgrind --log-file=valgrind.log --leak-check=full ./vim
 
 Note: Vim will run much slower.  If your .vimrc is big or you have several
-plugins you need to be patient for startup, or run with the "-u NONE"
+plugins you need to be patient for startup, or run with the "--clean"
 argument.
 
 There are often a few leaks from libraries, such as getpwuid() and

runtime/doc/develop.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*develop.txt*   For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2017 Jan 05
+*develop.txt*   For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2017 Jul 31
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -143,9 +143,10 @@ and its environment.
 
 VIM IS... NOT						*design-not*
 
-- Vim is not a shell or an Operating System.  You will not be able to run a
+- Vim is not a shell or an Operating System.  It does provide a terminal
-  shell inside Vim or use it to control a debugger.  This should work the
+  window, in which you can run a shell or debugger.  E.g. to be able to do
-  other way around: Use Vim as a component from a shell or in an IDE.
+  this over an ssh connection.  But if you don't need a text editor with that
+  it is out of scope (use something like screen or tmux instead).
   A satirical way to say this: "Unlike Emacs, Vim does not attempt to include
   everything but the kitchen sink, but some people say that you can clean one
   with it.  ;-)"

runtime/doc/diff.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*diff.txt*      For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2017 Feb 03
+*diff.txt*      For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2017 Sep 26
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -10,7 +10,7 @@ eight versions of the same file.
 
 The basics are explained in section |08.7| of the user manual.
 
-1. Starting diff mode		|vimdiff|
+1. Starting diff mode		|start-vimdiff|
 2. Viewing diffs		|view-diffs|
 3. Jumping to diffs		|jumpto-diffs|
 4. Copying diffs		|copy-diffs|
@@ -19,7 +19,7 @@ The basics are explained in section |08.7| of the user manual.
 {not in Vi}
 
 ==============================================================================
-1. Starting diff mode
+1. Starting diff mode					*start-vimdiff*
 
 The easiest way to start editing in diff mode is with the "vimdiff" command.
 This starts Vim as usual, and additionally sets up for viewing the differences
@@ -226,8 +226,8 @@ The diffs are highlighted with these groups:
 				(searching from the end of the line).  The
 				text in between is highlighted.  This means
 				that parts in the middle that are still the
-				same are highlighted anyway.  Only "iwhite" of
+				same are highlighted anyway.  The 'diffopt'
-				'diffopt' is used here.
+				flags "iwhite" and "icase" are used here.
 |hl-DiffDelete|	DiffDelete	Deleted lines.  Also called filler lines,
 				because they don't really exist in this
 				buffer.

runtime/doc/editing.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*editing.txt*   For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2017 Apr 10
+*editing.txt*   For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2017 Aug 21
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -617,16 +617,16 @@ list of the current window.
 			Also see |++opt| and |+cmd|.
 			{Vi: no ++opt}
 
-:[count]arge[dit][!] [++opt] [+cmd] {name}		*:arge* *:argedit*
+:[count]arge[dit][!] [++opt] [+cmd] {name} ..		*:arge* *:argedit*
-			Add {name} to the argument list and edit it.
+			Add {name}s to the argument list and edit it.
 			When {name} already exists in the argument list, this
 			entry is edited.
 			This is like using |:argadd| and then |:edit|.
-			Note that only one file name is allowed, and spaces
+			Spaces in filenames have to be escaped with "\".
-			inside the file name are allowed, like with |:edit|.
 			[count] is used like with |:argadd|.
-			[!] is required if the current file cannot be
+			If the current file cannot be |abandon|ed {name}s will
-			|abandon|ed.
+			still be added to the argument list, but won't be
+			edited. No check for duplicates is done.
 			Also see |++opt| and |+cmd|.
 			{not in Vi}
 
@@ -1109,6 +1109,7 @@ The names can be in upper- or lowercase.
 			window in the current tab page the current tab page is
 			closed |tab-page|.
 			Triggers the |QuitPre| autocommand event.
+			See |CTRL-W_q| for quitting another window.
 
 :conf[irm] q[uit]	Quit, but give prompt when changes have been made, or
 			the last file in the argument list has not been
@@ -1328,9 +1329,11 @@ present in 'cpoptions' and "!" is not used in the command.
 :chd[ir][!] [path]	Same as |:cd|.
 
 							*:lc* *:lcd*
-:lc[d][!] {path}	Like |:cd|, but only set the current directory for the
+:lc[d][!] {path}	Like |:cd|, but only set the current directory when
-			current window.  The current directory for other
+			the cursor is in the current window.  The current
-			windows is not changed. {not in Vi}
+			directory for other windows is not changed, switching
+			to another window will stop using {path}.
+			{not in Vi}
 
 							*:lch* *:lchdir*
 :lch[dir][!]		Same as |:lcd|. {not in Vi}
@@ -1735,7 +1738,7 @@ There are three different types of searching:
    This searches the same directories, but in a different order.
 
    Note that completion for ":find", ":sfind", and ":tabfind" commands do not
-   currently work with 'path' items that contain a url or use the double star
+   currently work with 'path' items that contain a URL or use the double star
    with depth limiter (/usr/**2) or upward search (;) notations.
 
  vim:tw=78:ts=8:ft=help:norl:

runtime/doc/eval.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*eval.txt*	For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2017 Jun 04
+*eval.txt*	For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2017 Sep 17
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL	  by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -1449,7 +1449,7 @@ v:beval_text	The text under or after the mouse pointer.  Usually a word as
 		but a dot and "->" before the position is included.  When on a
 		']' the text before it is used, including the matching '[' and
 		word before it.  When on a Visual area within one line the
-		highlighted text is used.
+		highlighted text is used.  Also see |<cexpr>|.
 		Only valid while evaluating the 'balloonexpr' option.
 
 					*v:beval_winnr* *beval_winnr-variable*
@@ -1815,7 +1815,7 @@ v:scrollstart	String describing the script or function that caused the
 		hit-enter prompt.
 
 					*v:servername* *servername-variable*
-v:servername	The resulting registered |x11-clientserver| name if any.
+v:servername	The resulting registered |client-server-name| if any.
 		Read-only.
 
 		
@@ -1902,6 +1902,31 @@ v:termresponse	The escape sequence returned by the terminal for the |t_RV|
 		always 95 or bigger).  Pc is always zero.
 		{only when compiled with |+termresponse| feature}
 
+						*v:termblinkresp*
+v:termblinkresp	The escape sequence returned by the terminal for the |t_RC|
+		termcap entry.  This is used to find out whether the terminal
+		cursor is blinking. This is used by |term_getcursor()|.
+
+						*v:termstyleresp*
+v:termstyleresp	The escape sequence returned by the terminal for the |t_RS|
+		termcap entry.  This is used to find out what the shape of the
+		cursor is.  This is used by |term_getcursor()|.
+
+						*v:termrbgresp*
+v:termrbgresp	The escape sequence returned by the terminal for the |t_RB|
+		termcap entry.  This is used to find out what the terminal
+		background color is, see 'background'.
+
+						*v:termrfgresp*
+v:termrfgresp	The escape sequence returned by the terminal for the |t_RF|
+		termcap entry.  This is used to find out what the terminal
+		foreground color is.
+
+						*v:termu7resp*
+v:termu7resp	The escape sequence returned by the terminal for the |t_u7|
+		termcap entry.  This is used to find out what the terminal
+		does with ambiguous width characters, see 'ambiwidth'.
+
 					*v:testing* *testing-variable*
 v:testing	Must be set before using `test_garbagecollect_now()`.
 		Also, when set certain error messages won't be shown for 2
@@ -2179,7 +2204,7 @@ index({list}, {expr} [, {start} [, {ic}]])
 				Number	index in {list} where {expr} appears
 input({prompt} [, {text} [, {completion}]])
 				String	get input from the user
-inputdialog({prompt} [, {text} [, {completion}]]])
+inputdialog({prompt} [, {text} [, {completion}]])
 				String	like input() but in a GUI dialog
 inputlist({textlist})		Number	let the user pick from a choice list
 inputrestore()			Number	restore typeahead
@@ -2296,6 +2321,9 @@ searchpos({pattern} [, {flags} [, {stopline} [, {timeout}]]])
 server2client({clientid}, {string})
 				Number	send reply string
 serverlist()			String	get a list of available servers
+setbufline( {expr}, {lnum}, {line})
+				Number	set line {lnum} to {line} in buffer
+					{expr}
 setbufvar({expr}, {varname}, {val})
 				none	set {varname} in buffer {expr} to {val}
 setcharsearch({dict})		Dict	set character search from {dict}
@@ -2369,9 +2397,25 @@ tagfiles()			List	tags files used
 tan({expr})			Float	tangent of {expr}
 tanh({expr})			Float	hyperbolic tangent of {expr}
 tempname()			String	name for a temporary file
+term_getaltscreen({buf})	Number	get the alternate screen flag
+term_getattr({attr}, {what})	Number	get the value of attribute {what}
+term_getcursor({buf})		List	get the cursor position of a terminal
+term_getjob({buf})		Job	get the job associated with a terminal
+term_getline({buf}, {row})	String	get a line of text from a terminal
+term_getscrolled({buf})		Number	get the scroll count of a terminal
+term_getsize({buf})		List	get the size of a terminal
+term_getstatus({buf})		String	get the status of a terminal
+term_gettitle({buf})		String	get the title of a terminal
+term_getttty({buf}, [{input}])	String	get the tty name of a terminal
+term_list()			List	get the list of terminal buffers
+term_scrape({buf}, {row})	List	get row of a terminal screen
+term_sendkeys({buf}, {keys})	none	send keystrokes to a terminal
+term_start({cmd}, {options})	Job	open a terminal window and run a job
+term_wait({buf} [, {time}])	Number  wait for screen to be updated
 test_alloc_fail({id}, {countdown}, {repeat})
 				none	make memory allocation fail
 test_autochdir()		none	enable 'autochdir' during startup
+test_feedinput()		none	add key sequence to input buffer
 test_garbagecollect_now()	none	free memory right now for testing
 test_ignore_error({expr})	none	ignore a specific error
 test_null_channel()		Channel	null value for testing
@@ -2971,6 +3015,11 @@ ch_logfile({fname} [, {mode}])					*ch_logfile()*
 		The file is flushed after every message, on Unix you can use
 		"tail -f" to see what is going on in real time.
 
+		This function is not available in the |sandbox|.
+		NOTE: the channel communication is stored in the file, be
+		aware that this may contain confidential and privacy sensitive
+		information, e.g. a password you type in a terminal window.
+
 
 ch_open({address} [, {options}])				*ch_open()*
 		Open a channel to {address}.  See |channel|.
@@ -3249,11 +3298,16 @@ cosh({expr})						*cosh()*
 		
 count({comp}, {expr} [, {ic} [, {start}]])			*count()*
 		Return the number of times an item with value {expr} appears
-		in |List| or |Dictionary| {comp}.
+		in |String|, |List| or |Dictionary| {comp}.
+
 		If {start} is given then start with the item with this index.
 		{start} can only be used with a |List|.
+
 		When {ic} is given and it's |TRUE| then case is ignored.
 
+		When {comp} is a string then the number of not overlapping
+		occurrences of {expr} is returned.
+
 
 							*cscope_connection()*
 cscope_connection([{num} , {dbpath} [, {prepend}]])
@@ -3418,7 +3472,7 @@ escape({string}, {chars})				*escape()*
 			:echo escape('c:\program files\vim', ' \')
 <		results in: >
 			c:\\program\ files\\vim
-<		Also see |shellescape()|.
+<		Also see |shellescape()| and |fnameescape()|.
 
 							*eval()*
 eval({string})	Evaluate {string} and return the result.  Especially useful to
@@ -3838,7 +3892,7 @@ float2nr({expr})					*float2nr()*
 		When the value of {expr} is out of range for a |Number| the
 		result is truncated to 0x7fffffff or -0x7fffffff (or when
 		64-bit Number support is enabled, 0x7fffffffffffffff or
-		-0x7fffffffffffffff.  NaN results in -0x80000000 (or when
+		-0x7fffffffffffffff).  NaN results in -0x80000000 (or when
 		64-bit Number support is enabled, -0x8000000000000000).
 		Examples: >
 			echo float2nr(3.95)
@@ -4189,14 +4243,14 @@ getchar([expr])						*getchar()*
 			not consumed.  Return zero if no character available.
 
 		Without [expr] and when [expr] is 0 a whole character or
-		special key is returned.  If it is an 8-bit character, the
+		special key is returned.  If it is a single character, the
 		result is a number.  Use nr2char() to convert it to a String.
 		Otherwise a String is returned with the encoded character.
-		For a special key it's a sequence of bytes starting with 0x80
+		For a special key it's a String with a sequence of bytes
-		(decimal: 128).  This is the same value as the string
+		starting with 0x80 (decimal: 128).  This is the same value as
-		"\<Key>", e.g., "\<Left>".  The returned value is also a
+		the String "\<Key>", e.g., "\<Left>".  The returned value is
-		String when a modifier (shift, control, alt) was used that is
+		also a String when a modifier (shift, control, alt) was used
-		not included in the character.
+		that is not included in the character.
 
 		When [expr] is 0 and Esc is typed, there will be a short delay
 		while Vim waits to see if this is the start of an escape
@@ -4350,6 +4404,7 @@ getcompletion({pat}, {type} [, {filtered}])		*getcompletion()*
 		highlight	highlight groups
 		history		:history suboptions
 		locale		locale names (as output of locale -a)
+		mapclear        buffer argument
 		mapping		mapping name
 		menu		menus
 		messages	|:messages| suboptions
@@ -4586,25 +4641,52 @@ getqflist([{what}])					*getqflist()*
 		returns only the items listed in {what} as a dictionary. The
 		following string items are supported in {what}:
 			context	get the context stored with |setqflist()|
+			efm	errorformat to use when parsing "lines". If
+				not present, then the 'erroformat' option
+				value is used.
+			id	get information for the quickfix list with
+				|quickfix-ID|; zero means the id for the
+				current list or the list specifed by "nr"
+			idx	index of the current entry in the list
+			items	quickfix list entries
+			lines	use 'errorformat' to extract items from a list
+				of lines and return the resulting entries.
+				Only a |List| type is accepted.  The current
+				quickfix list is not modified.
 			nr	get information for this quickfix list; zero
-				means the current quickfix list
+				means the current quickfix list and "$" means
+				the last quickfix list
+			size	number of entries in the quickfix list
 			title	get the list title
 			winid	get the |window-ID| (if opened)
 			all	all of the above quickfix properties
 		Non-string items in {what} are ignored.
 		If "nr" is not present then the current quickfix list is used.
+		If both "nr" and a non-zero "id" are specified, then the list
+		specified by "id" is used.
+		To get the number of lists in the quickfix stack, set "nr" to
+		"$" in {what}. The "nr" value in the returned dictionary
+		contains the quickfix stack size.
+		When "lines" is specified, all the other items except "efm"
+		are ignored.  The returned dictionary contains the entry
+		"items" with the list of entries.
 		In case of error processing {what}, an empty dictionary is
 		returned.
 
 		The returned dictionary contains the following entries:
 			context	context information stored with |setqflist()|
+			id	quickfix list ID |quickfix-ID|
+			idx	index of the current entry in the list
+			items	quickfix list entries
 			nr	quickfix list number
+			size	number of entries in the quickfix list
 			title	quickfix list title text
 			winid	quickfix |window-ID| (if opened)
 
 		Examples: >
 			:echo getqflist({'all': 1})
 			:echo getqflist({'nr': 2, 'title': 1})
+			:echo getqflist({'lines' : ["F1:10:L10"]})
 <
 
 getreg([{regname} [, 1 [, {list}]]])			*getreg()*
@@ -4710,11 +4792,15 @@ getwininfo([{winid}])					*getwininfo()*
 
 		Each List item is a Dictionary with the following entries:
 			bufnr		number of buffer in the window
-			height		window height
+			height		window height (excluding winbar)
+			winbar		1 if the window has a toolbar, 0
+					otherwise
 			loclist		1 if showing a location list
 					{only with the +quickfix feature}
 			quickfix	1 if quickfix or location list window
 					{only with the +quickfix feature}
+			terminal	1 if a terminal window
+					{only with the +terminal feature}
 			tabnr		tab page number
 			variables	a reference to the dictionary with
 					window-local variables
@@ -5169,6 +5255,9 @@ job_info({job})						*job_info()*
 		Returns a Dictionary with information about {job}:
 		   "status"	what |job_status()| returns
 		   "channel"	what |job_getchannel()| returns
+		   "process"	process ID
+		   "tty_in"	terminal input name, empty when none
+		   "tty_out"	terminal output name, empty when none
 		   "exitval"	only valid when "status" is "dead"
 		   "exit_cb"	function to be called on exit
 		   "stoponexit"	|job-stoponexit|
@@ -5181,6 +5270,7 @@ job_setoptions({job}, {options})			*job_setoptions()*
 job_start({command} [, {options}])			*job_start()*
 		Start a job and return a Job object.  Unlike |system()| and
 		|:!cmd| this does not wait for the job to finish.
+		To start a job in a terminal window see |term_start()|.
 
 		{command} can be a String.  This works best on MS-Windows.  On
 		Unix it is split up in white-separated parts to be passed to
@@ -5461,7 +5551,10 @@ line({expr})	The result is a Number, which is the line number of the file
 <							*last-position-jump*
 		This autocommand jumps to the last known position in a file
 		just after opening it, if the '" mark is set: >
-	:au BufReadPost * if line("'\"") > 1 && line("'\"") <= line("$") | exe "normal! g`\"" | endif
+     :au BufReadPost *
+	 \ if line("'\"") > 1 && line("'\"") <= line("$") && &ft !~# 'commit' 
+	 \ |   exe "normal! g`\""
+	 \ | endif
 
 line2byte({lnum})					*line2byte()*
 		Return the byte count from the start of the buffer for line
@@ -5590,6 +5683,7 @@ maparg({name}[, {mode} [, {abbr} [, {dict}]]])			*maparg()*
 			"s"	Select
 			"x"	Visual
 			"l"	langmap |language-mapping|
+			"t"	Terminal-Job
 			""	Normal, Visual and Operator-pending
 		When {mode} is omitted, the modes for "" are used.
 
@@ -5883,7 +5977,7 @@ max({expr})	Return the maximum value of all items in {expr}.
 		it returns the maximum of all values in the dictionary.
 		If {expr} is neither a list nor a dictionary, or one of the
 		items in {expr} cannot be used as a Number this results in
-                an error.  An empty |List| or |Dictionary| results in zero.
+		an error.  An empty |List| or |Dictionary| results in zero.
 
 							*min()*
 min({expr})	Return the minimum value of all items in {expr}.
@@ -5891,7 +5985,7 @@ min({expr})	Return the minimum value of all items in {expr}.
 		it returns the minimum of all values in the dictionary.
 		If {expr} is neither a list nor a dictionary, or one of the
 		items in {expr} cannot be used as a Number this results in
-                an error.  An empty |List| or |Dictionary| results in zero.
+		an error.  An empty |List| or |Dictionary| results in zero.
 
 							*mkdir()* *E739*
 mkdir({name} [, {path} [, {prot}]])
@@ -5916,7 +6010,7 @@ mode([expr])	Return a string that indicates the current mode.
 		a non-empty String (|non-zero-arg|), then the full mode is
 		returned, otherwise only the first letter is returned.
 
-			n	Normal
+			n	Normal, Terminal-Normal
 			no	Operator-pending
 			v	Visual by character
 			V	Visual by line
@@ -5938,6 +6032,7 @@ mode([expr])	Return a string that indicates the current mode.
 			rm	The -- more -- prompt
 			r?	A |:confirm| query of some sort
 			!	Shell or external command is executing
+			t	Terminal-Job mode: keys go to the job
 		This is useful in the 'statusline' option or when used
 		with |remote_expr()| In most other places it always returns
 		"c" or "n".
@@ -6186,8 +6281,8 @@ printf({fmt}, {expr1} ...)				*printf()*
 			zero the decimal point is omitted.  When the precision
 			is not specified 6 is used.  A really big number
 			(out of range or dividing by zero) results in "inf"
-                        or "-inf" with %f (INF or -INF with %F).
+			or "-inf" with %f (INF or -INF with %F).
-                        "0.0 / 0.0" results in "nan" with %f (NAN with %F).
+			"0.0 / 0.0" results in "nan" with %f (NAN with %F).
 			Example: >
 				echo printf("%.2f", 12.115)
 <				12.12
@@ -6783,6 +6878,19 @@ serverlist()					*serverlist()*
 		Example: >
 			:echo serverlist()
 <
+setbufline({expr}, {lnum}, {text})			*setbufline()*
+		Set line {lnum} to {text} in buffer {expr}.  To insert
+		lines use |append()|.
+
+		For the use of {expr}, see |bufname()| above.
+
+		{lnum} is used like with |setline()|.
+		This works like |setline()| for the specified buffer.
+		On success 0 is returned, on failure 1 is returned.
+
+		If {expr} is not a valid buffer or {lnum} is not valid, an
+		error message is given.
+
 setbufvar({expr}, {varname}, {val})			*setbufvar()*
 		Set option or local variable {varname} in buffer {expr} to
 		{val}.
@@ -6851,13 +6959,19 @@ setfperm({fname}, {mode})				*setfperm()* *chmod*
 
 setline({lnum}, {text})					*setline()*
 		Set line {lnum} of the current buffer to {text}.  To insert
-		lines use |append()|.
+		lines use |append()|. To set lines in another buffer use
+		|setbufline()|.
+
 		{lnum} is used like with |getline()|.
 		When {lnum} is just below the last line the {text} will be
 		added as a new line.
+
 		If this succeeds, 0 is returned.  If this fails (most likely
-		because {lnum} is invalid) 1 is returned.  Example: >
+		because {lnum} is invalid) 1 is returned.
+
+		Example: >
 			:call setline(5, strftime("%c"))
+
 <		When {text} is a |List| then line {lnum} and following lines
 		will be set to the items in the list.  Example: >
 			:call setline(5, ['aaa', 'bbb', 'ccc'])
@@ -6865,6 +6979,7 @@ setline({lnum}, {text})					*setline()*
 			:for [n, l] in [[5, 'aaa'], [6, 'bbb'], [7, 'ccc']]
 			:  call setline(n, l)
 			:endfor
+
 <		Note: The '[ and '] marks are not set.
 
 setloclist({nr}, {list}[, {action}[, {what}]])		*setloclist()*
@@ -6936,10 +7051,12 @@ setpos({expr}, {list})
 		|winrestview()|.
 
 setqflist({list} [, {action}[, {what}]])		*setqflist()*
-		Create or replace or add to the quickfix list using the items
+		Create or replace or add to the quickfix list.
-		in {list}.  Each item in {list} is a dictionary.
+		
-		Non-dictionary items in {list} are ignored.  Each dictionary
+		When {what} is not present, use the items in {list}.  Each
-		item can contain the following entries:
+		item must be a dictionary.  Non-dictionary items in {list} are
+		ignored.  Each dictionary item can contain the following
+		entries:
 
 		    bufnr	buffer number; must be the number of a valid
 				buffer
@@ -6984,22 +7101,41 @@ setqflist({list} [, {action}[, {what}]])		*setqflist()*
 			freed.
 
 		If {action} is not present or is set to ' ', then a new list
-		is created.
+		is created. The new quickfix list is added after the current
+		quickfix list in the stack and all the following lists are
+		freed. To add a new quickfix list at the end of the stack,
+		set "nr" in {what} to "$".
 
 		If the optional {what} dictionary argument is supplied, then
 		only the items listed in {what} are set. The first {list}
 		argument is ignored.  The following items can be specified in
 		{what}:
 		    context	any Vim type can be stored as a context
-		    nr		list number in the quickfix stack
+		    efm		errorformat to use when parsing text from
+				"lines". If this is not present, then the
+				'errorformat' option value is used.
+		    id		quickfix list identifier |quickfix-ID|
+		    items	list of quickfix entries. Same as the {list}
+				argument.
+		    lines	use 'errorformat' to parse a list of lines and
+				add the resulting entries to the quickfix list
+				{nr} or {id}.  Only a |List| value is supported.
+		    nr		list number in the quickfix stack; zero
+				means the current quickfix list and "$" means
+				the last quickfix list
 		    title	quickfix list title text
 		Unsupported keys in {what} are ignored.
 		If the "nr" item is not present, then the current quickfix list
-		is modified.
+		is modified. When creating a new quickfix list, "nr" can be
+		set to a value one greater than the quickfix stack size.
+		When modifying a quickfix list, to guarantee that the correct
+		list is modified, "id" should be used instead of "nr" to
+		specify the list.
 
 		Examples: >
-			:call setqflist([], 'r', {'title': 'My search'})
+		   :call setqflist([], 'r', {'title': 'My search'})
-			:call setqflist([], 'r', {'nr': 2, 'title': 'Errors'})
+		   :call setqflist([], 'r', {'nr': 2, 'title': 'Errors'})
+		   :call setqflist([], 'a', {'id':myid, 'lines':["F1:10:L10"]})
 <
 		Returns zero for success, -1 for failure.
 
@@ -7041,16 +7177,17 @@ setreg({regname}, {value} [, {options}])
 			:call setreg('a', "1\n2\n3", 'b5')
 
 <		This example shows using the functions to save and restore a
-		register (note: you may not reliably restore register value 
+		register: >
-		without using the third argument to |getreg()| as without it 
-		newlines are represented as newlines AND Nul bytes are 
-		represented as newlines as well, see |NL-used-for-Nul|). >
 			:let var_a = getreg('a', 1, 1)
 			:let var_amode = getregtype('a')
 			    ....
 			:call setreg('a', var_a, var_amode)
+<		Note: you may not reliably restore register value 
+		without using the third argument to |getreg()| as without it 
+		newlines are represented as newlines AND Nul bytes are
+		represented as newlines as well, see |NL-used-for-Nul|.
 
-<		You can also change the type of a register by appending
+		You can also change the type of a register by appending
 		nothing: >
 			:call setreg('a', '', 'al')
 
@@ -7095,18 +7232,22 @@ shellescape({string} [, {special}])			*shellescape()*
 		quotes within {string}.
 		Otherwise it will enclose {string} in single quotes and
 		replace all "'" with "'\''".
+
 		When the {special} argument is present and it's a non-zero
 		Number or a non-empty String (|non-zero-arg|), then special
 		items such as "!", "%", "#" and "<cword>" will be preceded by
 		a backslash.  This backslash will be removed again by the |:!|
 		command.
+
 		The "!" character will be escaped (again with a |non-zero-arg|
 		{special}) when 'shell' contains "csh" in the tail.  That is
 		because for csh and tcsh "!" is used for history replacement
 		even when inside single quotes.
-		The <NL> character is also escaped.  With a |non-zero-arg|
+
-		{special} and 'shell' containing "csh" in the tail it's
+		With a |non-zero-arg| {special} the <NL> character is also
+		escaped.  When 'shell' containing "csh" in the tail it's
 		escaped a second time.
+
 		Example of use with a |:!| command: >
 		    :exe '!dir ' . shellescape(expand('<cfile>'), 1)
 <		This results in a directory listing for the file under the
@@ -7626,6 +7767,7 @@ synIDattr({synID}, {what} [, {mode}])			*synIDattr()*
 		"standout"	"1" if standout
 		"underline"	"1" if underlined
 		"undercurl"	"1" if undercurled
+		"strike"	"1" if strikethrough
 
 		Example (echoes the color of the syntax item under the
 		cursor): >
@@ -7638,17 +7780,29 @@ synIDtrans({synID})					*synIDtrans()*
 		":highlight link" are followed.
 
 synconcealed({lnum}, {col})				*synconcealed()*
-		The result is a List. The first item in the list is 0 if the
+		The result is a List with currently three items:
-		character at the position {lnum} and {col} is not part of a
+		1. The first item in the list is 0 if the character at the
-		concealable region, 1 if it is. The second item in the list is
+		   position {lnum} and {col} is not part of a concealable
-		a string. If the first item is 1, the second item contains the
+		   region, 1 if it is.
-		text which will be displayed in place of the concealed text,
+		2. The second item in the list is a string. If the first item
-		depending on the current setting of 'conceallevel'. The third
+		   is 1, the second item contains the text which will be
-		and final item in the list is a unique number representing the
+		   displayed in place of the concealed text, depending on the
-		specific syntax region matched. This allows detection of the
+		   current setting of 'conceallevel' and 'listchars'.
-		beginning of a new concealable region if there are two
+		3. The third and final item in the list is a number
-		consecutive regions with the same replacement character.
+		   representing the specific syntax region matched in the
-		For an example use see $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/2html.vim .
+		   line. When the character is not concealed the value is
+		   zero. This allows detection of the beginning of a new
+		   concealable region if there are two consecutive regions
+		   with the same replacement character.  For an example, if
+		   the text is "123456" and both "23" and "45" are concealed
+		   and replace by the character "X", then:
+			call			returns ~
+			synconcealed(lnum, 1)   [0, '', 0]
+			synconcealed(lnum, 2)   [1, 'X', 1]
+			synconcealed(lnum, 3)   [1, 'X', 1]
+			synconcealed(lnum, 4)   [1, 'X', 2]
+			synconcealed(lnum, 5)   [1, 'X', 2]
+			synconcealed(lnum, 6)   [0, '', 0]
 
 
 synstack({lnum}, {col})					*synstack()*
@@ -7857,6 +8011,203 @@ tempname()					*tempname()* *temp-file-name*
 		For MS-Windows forward slashes are used when the 'shellslash'
 		option is set or when 'shellcmdflag' starts with '-'.
 
+term_getaltscreen({buf})				*term_getaltscreen()*
+		Returns 1 if the terminal of {buf} is using the alternate
+		screen.
+		{buf} is used as with |term_getsize()|.
+		{only available when compiled with the |+terminal| feature}
+
+term_getattr({attr}, {what})				*term_getattr()*
+		Given {attr}, a value returned by term_scrape() in the "attr"
+		item, return whether {what} is on.  {what} can be one of:
+			bold
+			italic
+			underline
+			strike
+			reverse
+		{only available when compiled with the |+terminal| feature}
+
+term_getcursor({buf})					*term_getcursor()*
+		Get the cursor position of terminal {buf}. Returns a list with
+		two numbers and a dictionary: [row, col, dict].
+
+		"row" and "col" are one based, the first screen cell is row
+		1, column 1.  This is the cursor position of the terminal
+		itself, not of the Vim window.
+
+		"dict" can have these members:
+		   "visible"	one when the cursor is visible, zero when it
+				is hidden.
+		   "blink"	one when the cursor is visible, zero when it
+				is hidden.
+		   "shape"	1 for a block cursor, 2 for underline and 3
+				for a vertical bar.
+
+		{buf} must be the buffer number of a terminal window. If the
+		buffer does not exist or is not a terminal window, an empty
+		list is returned.
+		{only available when compiled with the |+terminal| feature}
+
+term_getjob({buf})					*term_getjob()*
+		Get the Job associated with terminal window {buf}.
+		{buf} is used as with |term_getsize()|.
+		Returns |v:null| when there is no job.
+		{only available when compiled with the |+terminal| feature}
+
+term_getline({buf}, {row})				*term_getline()*
+		Get a line of text from the terminal window of {buf}.
+		{buf} is used as with |term_getsize()|.
+
+		The first line has {row} one.  When {row} is "." the cursor
+		line is used.  When {row} is invalid an empty string is
+		returned.
+		{only available when compiled with the |+terminal| feature}
+
+term_getscrolled({buf})					*term_getscrolled()*
+		Return the number of lines that scrolled to above the top of
+		terminal {buf}.  This is the offset between the row number
+		used for |term_getline()| and |getline()|, so that: >
+			term_getline(buf, N)
+<		is equal to: >
+			`getline(N + term_getscrolled(buf))
+<		(if that line exists).
+
+		{buf} is used as with |term_getsize()|.
+		{only available when compiled with the |+terminal| feature}
+
+term_getsize({buf})					*term_getsize()*
+		Get the size of terminal {buf}. Returns a list with two
+		numbers: [rows, cols].  This is the size of the terminal, not
+		the window containing the terminal.
+
+		{buf} must be the buffer number of a terminal window.  Use an
+		empty string for the current buffer.  If the buffer does not
+		exist or is not a terminal window, an empty list is returned.
+		{only available when compiled with the |+terminal| feature}
+
+term_getstatus({buf})					*term_getstatus()*
+		Get the status of terminal {buf}. This returns a comma
+		separated list of these items:
+			running		job is running
+			finished	job has finished
+			normal		in Terminal-Normal mode
+		One of "running" or "finished" is always present.
+
+		{buf} must be the buffer number of a terminal window. If the
+		buffer does not exist or is not a terminal window, an empty
+		string is returned.
+		{only available when compiled with the |+terminal| feature}
+
+term_gettitle({buf})					*term_gettitle()*
+		Get the title of terminal {buf}. This is the title that the
+		job in the terminal has set.
+
+		{buf} must be the buffer number of a terminal window. If the
+		buffer does not exist or is not a terminal window, an empty
+		string is returned.
+		{only available when compiled with the |+terminal| feature}
+
+term_gettty({buf} [, {input}])				*term_gettty()*
+		Get the name of the controlling terminal associated with
+		terminal window {buf}.  {buf} is used as with |term_getsize()|.
+
+		When {input} is omitted or 0, return the name for writing
+		(stdout). When {input} is 1 return the name for reading
+		(stdin). On UNIX, both return same name.
+		{only available when compiled with the |+terminal| feature}
+
+term_list()						*term_list()*
+		Return a list with the buffer numbers of all buffers for
+		terminal windows.
+		{only available when compiled with the |+terminal| feature}
+
+term_scrape({buf}, {row})				*term_scrape()*
+		Get the contents of {row} of terminal screen of {buf}.
+		For {buf} see |term_getsize()|.
+
+		The first line has {row} one.  When {row} is "." the cursor
+		line is used.  When {row} is invalid an empty string is
+		returned.
+
+		Return a List containing a Dict for each screen cell: 
+		    "chars"	character(s) at the cell
+		    "fg"	foreground color as #rrggbb
+		    "bg"	background color as #rrggbb
+		    "attr"	attributes of the cell, use |term_getattr()|
+				to get the individual flags
+		    "width"	cell width: 1 or 2
+		{only available when compiled with the |+terminal| feature}
+
+term_sendkeys({buf}, {keys})				*term_sendkeys()*
+		Send keystrokes {keys} to terminal {buf}.
+		{buf} is used as with |term_getsize()|.
+
+		{keys} are translated as key sequences. For example, "\<c-x>"
+		means the character CTRL-X.
+		{only available when compiled with the |+terminal| feature}
+
+term_setsize({buf}, {expr})				*term_setsize()*
+		Not implemented yet.
+		{only available when compiled with the |+terminal| feature}
+
+term_start({cmd}, {options})				*term_start()*
+		Open a terminal window and run {cmd} in it.
+
+		Returns the buffer number of the terminal window.  If {cmd}
+		cannot be executed the window does open and shows an error
+		message.
+		If opening the window fails zero is returned.
+
+		{options} are similar to what is used for |job_start()|, see
+		|job-options|.  However, not all options can be used.  These
+		are supported:
+		   all timeout options
+		   "stoponexit"
+		   "callback", "out_cb", "err_cb"
+		   "exit_cb", "close_cb"
+		   "in_io", "in_top", "in_bot", "in_name", "in_buf"
+		   "out_io", "out_name", "out_buf", "out_modifiable", "out_msg"
+		   "err_io", "err_name", "err_buf", "err_modifiable", "err_msg"
+		However, at least one of stdin, stdout or stderr must be
+		connected to the terminal.  When I/O is connected to the
+		terminal then the callback function for that part is not used.
+
+		There are extra options:
+		   "term_name"	     name to use for the buffer name, instead
+				     of the command name.
+		   "term_rows"	     vertical size to use for the terminal,
+				     instead of using 'termsize'
+		   "term_cols"	     horizontal size to use for the terminal,
+				     instead of using 'termsize'
+		   "vertical"	     split the window vertically
+		   "curwin"	     use the current window, do not split the
+				     window; fails if the current buffer
+				     cannot be |abandon|ed
+		   "hidden"	     do not open a window
+		   "term_finish"     What to do when the job is finished:
+					"close": close any windows
+					"open": open window if needed
+				     Note that "open" can be interruptive.
+				     See |term++close| and |term++open|.
+		   "term_opencmd"    command to use for opening the window when
+				     "open" is used for "term_finish"; must
+				     have "%d" where the buffer number goes,
+				     e.g. "10split|buffer %d"; when not
+				     specified "botright sbuf %d" is used
+		   "eof_chars"	     Text to send after all buffer lines were
+				     written to the terminal.  When not set
+				     CTRL-D is used on MS-Windows. For Python
+				     use CTRL-Z or "exit()". For a shell use
+				     "exit".  A CR is always added.
+
+		{only available when compiled with the |+terminal| feature}
+
+term_wait({buf} [, {time}])					*term_wait()*
+		Wait for pending updates of {buf} to be handled.
+		{buf} is used as with |term_getsize()|.
+		{time} is how long to wait for updates to arrive in msec.  If
+		not set then 10 msec will be used.
+		{only available when compiled with the |+terminal| feature}
 
 test_alloc_fail({id}, {countdown}, {repeat})		*test_alloc_fail()*
 		This is for testing: If the memory allocation with {id} is
@@ -7868,6 +8219,11 @@ test_autochdir()					*test_autochdir()*
 		Set a flag to enable the effect of 'autochdir' before Vim
 		startup has finished.
 
+test_feedinput({string})				*test_feedinput()*
+		Characters in {string} are queued for processing as if they
+		were typed by the user. This uses a low level input buffer.
+		This function works only when with |+unix| or GUI is running.
+
 test_garbagecollect_now()			 *test_garbagecollect_now()*
 		Like garbagecollect(), but executed right away.  This must
 		only be called directly to avoid any structure to exist
@@ -7913,8 +8269,19 @@ test_override({name}, {val})				*test_override()*
 		name	     effect when {val} is non-zero ~
 		redraw       disable the redrawing() function
 		char_avail   disable the char_avail() function
+		starting     reset the "starting" variable, see below
 		ALL	     clear all overrides ({val} is not used)
 
+		"starting" is to be used when a test should behave like
+		startup was done.  Since the tests are run by sourcing a
+		script the "starting" variable is non-zero. This is usually a
+		good thing (tests run faster), but sometimes changes behavior
+		in a way that the test doesn't work properly.
+		When using: >
+			call test_override('starting', 1)
+<		The value of "starting" is saved.  It is restored by: >
+			call test_override('starting', 0)
+
 test_settime({expr})					*test_settime()*
 		Set the time Vim uses internally.  Currently only used for
 		timestamps in the history, as they are used in viminfo, and
@@ -7976,6 +8343,10 @@ timer_start({time}, {callback} [, {options}])
 		   "repeat"	Number of times to repeat calling the
 				callback.  -1 means forever.  When not present
 				the callback will be called once.
+				If the timer causes an error three times in a
+				row the repeat is cancelled.  This avoids that
+				Vim becomes unusable because of all the error
+				messages.
 
 		Example: >
 			func MyHandler(timer)
@@ -8210,7 +8581,7 @@ win_getid([{win} [, {tab}]])				*win_getid()*
 		Get the |window-ID| for the specified window.
 		When {win} is missing use the current window.
 		With {win} this is the window number.  The top window has
-		number 1.
+		number 1.  Use `win_getid(winnr())` for the current window.
 		Without {tab} use the current tab, otherwise the tab with
 		number {tab}.  The first tab has number one.
 		Return zero if the window cannot be found.
@@ -8250,6 +8621,7 @@ winheight({nr})						*winheight()*
 		When {nr} is zero, the height of the current window is
 		returned.  When window {nr} doesn't exist, -1 is returned.
 		An existing window always has a height of zero or more.
+		This excludes any window toolbar line.
 		Examples: >
   :echo "The current window has " . winheight(0) . " lines."
 <
@@ -8335,8 +8707,8 @@ winwidth({nr})						*winwidth()*
   :if winwidth(0) <= 50
   :  exe "normal 50\<C-W>|"
   :endif
-<               For getting the terminal or screen size, see the 'columns'
+<		For getting the terminal or screen size, see the 'columns'
-               option.
+		option.
 
 
 wordcount()						*wordcount()*
@@ -8354,11 +8726,11 @@ wordcount()						*wordcount()*
 			cursor_words    Number of words before cursor position
 					(not in Visual mode)
 			visual_bytes    Number of bytes visually selected
-			                (only in Visual mode)
+					(only in Visual mode)
 			visual_chars    Number of chars visually selected
-			                (only in Visual mode)
+					(only in Visual mode)
-			visual_words    Number of chars visually selected
+			visual_words    Number of words visually selected
-			                (only in Visual mode)
+					(only in Visual mode)
 
 
 							*writefile()*
@@ -8566,6 +8938,7 @@ tag_any_white		Compiled with support for any white characters in tags
 			files |tag-any-white|.
 tcl			Compiled with Tcl interface.
 termguicolors		Compiled with true color in terminal support.
+terminal		Compiled with |terminal| support.
 terminfo		Compiled with terminfo instead of termcap.
 termresponse		Compiled with support for |t_RV| and |v:termresponse|.
 textobjects		Compiled with support for |text-objects|.
@@ -8576,7 +8949,7 @@ title			Compiled with window title support |'title'|.
 toolbar			Compiled with support for |gui-toolbar|.
 ttyin			input is a terminal (tty)
 ttyout			output is a terminal (tty)
-unix			Unix version of Vim.
+unix			Unix version of Vim. *+unix*
 unnamedplus		Compiled with support for "unnamedplus" in 'clipboard'
 user_commands		User-defined commands.
 vertsplit		Compiled with vertically split windows |:vsplit|.
@@ -8702,6 +9075,9 @@ See |:verbose-cmd| for more information.
 			not used an error message is given.  When [!] is used,
 			an existing function is silently replaced.  Unless it
 			is currently being executed, that is an error.
+			NOTE: Use ! wisely.  If used without care it can cause
+			an existing function to be replaced unexpectedly,
+			which is hard to debug.
 
 			For the {arguments} see |function-argument|.
 
@@ -8751,18 +9127,36 @@ See |:verbose-cmd| for more information.
 			implies that the effect of |:nohlsearch| is undone
 			when the function returns.
 
-					*:endf* *:endfunction* *E126* *E193*
+				*:endf* *:endfunction* *E126* *E193* *W22*
-:endf[unction]		The end of a function definition.  Must be on a line
+:endf[unction] [argument]
-			by its own, without other commands.
+			The end of a function definition.  Best is to put it
+			on a line by its own, without [argument].
 
+			[argument] can be:
+				| command	command to execute next
+				\n command	command to execute next
+				" comment	always ignored
+				anything else	ignored, warning given when
+						'verbose' is non-zero
+			The support for a following command was added in Vim
+			8.0.0654, before that any argument was silently
+			ignored.
+
+			To be able to define a function inside an `:execute`
+			command, use line breaks instead of |:bar|: >
+				:exe "func Foo()\necho 'foo'\nendfunc"
+<
 				*:delf* *:delfunction* *E130* *E131* *E933*
-:delf[unction] {name}	Delete function {name}.
+:delf[unction][!] {name}
+			Delete function {name}.
 			{name} can also be a |Dictionary| entry that is a
 			|Funcref|: >
 				:delfunc dict.init
 <			This will remove the "init" entry from "dict".  The
 			function is deleted if there are no more references to
 			it.
+			With the ! there is no error if the function does not
+			exist.
 							*:retu* *:return* *E133*
 :retu[rn] [expr]	Return from a function.  When "[expr]" is given, it is
 			evaluated and returned as the result of the function.

runtime/doc/ft_rust.txt

@@ -116,13 +116,13 @@ g:rustfmt_options~
 
                                                           *g:rust_playpen_url*
 g:rust_playpen_url~
-	Set this option to override the url for the playpen to use: >
+	Set this option to override the URL for the playpen to use: >
 	    let g:rust_playpen_url = 'https://play.rust-lang.org/'
 <
 
                                                         *g:rust_shortener_url*
 g:rust_shortener_url~
-	Set this option to override the url for the url shortener: >
+	Set this option to override the URL for the URL shortener: >
 	    let g:rust_shortener_url = 'https://is.gd/'
 <
 
@@ -199,7 +199,7 @@ COMMANDS                                                       *rust-commands*
 		|g:rust_playpen_url| is the base URL to the playpen, by default
 		"https://play.rust-lang.org/".
 
-		|g:rust_shortener_url| is the base url for the shorterner, by
+		|g:rust_shortener_url| is the base URL for the shorterner, by
 		default "https://is.gd/"
 
 :RustFmt                                                       *:RustFmt*

runtime/doc/gui.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*gui.txt*       For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2014 Mar 08
+*gui.txt*       For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2017 Sep 23
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -67,7 +67,7 @@ When the GUI starts up initializations are carried out, in this order:
     executed as an Ex command.
   - If the user gvimrc file exists, it is sourced.  The name of this file is
     normally "$HOME/.gvimrc".  You can check this with ":version".
-  - For Win32, when $HOME is not set, "$VIM\_gvimrc" is used.
+  - For Win32, $HOME is set by Vim if needed, see |$HOME-windows|.
   - When a "_gvimrc" file is not found, ".gvimrc" is tried too.  And vice
     versa.
   The name of the first file found is stored in $MYGVIMRC, unless it was
@@ -79,7 +79,8 @@ When the GUI starts up initializations are carried out, in this order:
   and DOS/Win32 "_gvimrc" is tried first.
 
 NOTE: All but the first one are not carried out if Vim was started with
-"-u NONE" and no "-U" argument was given, or when started with "-U NONE".
+"-u NONE" or "-u DEFAULTS" and no "-U" argument was given, or when started
+with "-U NONE".
 
 All this happens AFTER the normal Vim initializations, like reading your
 .vimrc file.  See |initialization|.
@@ -783,10 +784,40 @@ In the Win32 and GTK+ GUI, starting a menu name with ']' excludes that menu
 from the main menu bar.  You must then use the |:popup| or |:tearoff| command
 to display it.
 
+					*window-toolbar* *WinBar*
+Each window can have a local toolbar.  This uses the first line of the window,
+thus reduces the space for the text by one line.  The items in the toolbar
+must start with "WinBar".
+
+Only text can be used.  When using Unicode, special characters can be used to
+make the items look like icons.
+
+If the items do not fit then the last ones cannot be used.  The toolbar does
+not wrap.
+
+Note that Vim may be in any mode when executing these commands.  The menu
+should be defined for Normal mode and will be executed without changing the
+current mode. Thus if the current window is in Visual mode and the menu
+command does not intentionally change the mode, Vim will remain in Visual
+mode.  Best is to use `:nnoremenu` to avoid side effects.
+
+Example for debugger tools: >
+	nnoremenu 1.10 WinBar.Step :Step<CR>
+	nnoremenu 1.20 WinBar.Next :Next<CR>
+	nnoremenu 1.30 WinBar.Finish :Finish<CR>
+	nnoremenu 1.40 WinBar.Cont :Continue<CR>
+<
+The window toolbar uses the ToolbarLine and ToolbarButton highlight groups.
+
+When splitting the window the window toolbar is not copied to the new window.
+
 							*popup-menu*
 In the Win32, GTK+, Motif, Athena and Photon GUI, you can define the
 special menu "PopUp".  This is the menu that is displayed when the right mouse
 button is pressed, if 'mousemodel' is set to popup or popup_setpos.
+Example: >
+    nnoremenu 1.40 PopUp.&Paste	"+gP
+    menu PopUp
 
 
 5.3 Showing What Menus Are Mapped To			*showing-menus*

runtime/doc/gui_x11.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*gui_x11.txt*   For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2016 Sep 12
+*gui_x11.txt*   For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2017 Jul 28
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -279,8 +279,9 @@ For CDE "dtwm" (a derivative of Motif) add this line in the .Xdefaults: >
 For "mwm" (Motif window manager) the line would be: >
    Mwm*Vim*iconImage: /usr/local/share/vim/vim32x32.xpm
 
-Mouse Pointers Available in X11				*X11_mouse_shapes*
 
+Mouse Pointers Available in X11 ~
+						*X11_mouse_shapes*
 By using the |'mouseshape'| option, the mouse pointer can be automatically
 changed whenever Vim enters one of its various modes (e.g., Insert or
 Command).  Currently, the available pointers are:
@@ -354,7 +355,9 @@ to the GTK documentation, however little there is, on how to do this.
 See http://developer.gnome.org/doc/API/2.0/gtk/gtk-Resource-Files.html
 for more information.
 
-						*gtk-tooltip-colors*
+
+Tooltip Colors ~
+							*gtk-tooltip-colors*
 Example, which sets the tooltip colors to black on light-yellow: >
 
 	style "tooltips"
@@ -372,15 +375,122 @@ distribution.
 For GTK+ 3, an effect similar to the above can be obtained by adding the
 following snippet of CSS code to $XDG_HOME_DIR/gtk-3.0/gtk.css (usually,
 $HOME/.config/gtk-3.0/gtk.css):
- >
+
+For GTK+ 3 < 3.20: >
+
 	.tooltip {
 		background-color: #ffffcc;
 		color: #000000;
 	}
 <
+For GTK+ 3 >= 3.20: >
 
-Using Vim as a GTK+ plugin				*gui-gtk-socketid*
+	tooltip {
+	    background-color: #ffffcc;
+	    text-shadow: none;
+	}
 
+	tooltip label {
+	    color: #2e3436;
+	}
+<
+
+A Quick Look at GTK+ CSS ~
+							*gtk-css*
+The contents of this subsection apply to GTK+ 3.20 or later which provides
+stable support for GTK+ CSS:
+
+	https://developer.gnome.org/gtk3/stable/theming.html
+
+GTK+ uses CSS for styling and layout of widgets.  In this subsection, we'll
+have a quick look at GTK+ CSS through simple, illustrative examples.
+
+Example 1.  Empty Space Adjustment ~
+
+By default, the toolbar and the tabline of the GTK+ 3 GUI are somewhat larger
+than those of the GTK+ 2 GUI.  Some people may want to make them look similar
+to the GTK+ 2 GUI in size.
+
+To do that, we'll try reducing empty space around icons and labels that looks
+apparently superfluous.
+
+Add the following lines to $XDG_HOME_DIR/gtk-3.0/gtk.css (usually,
+$HOME/.config/gtk-3.0/gtk.css): >
+
+	toolbar button {
+	    margin-top: -2px;
+	    margin-right: 0px;
+	    margin-bottom: -2px;
+	    margin-left: 0px;
+
+	    padding-top: 0px;
+	    padding-right: 0px;
+	    padding-bottom: 0px;
+	    padding-left: 0px
+	}
+
+	notebook tab {
+	    margin-top: -1px;
+	    margin-right: 3px;
+	    margin-bottom: -1px;
+	    margin-left: 3px;
+
+	    padding-top: 0px;
+	    padding-right: 0px;
+	    padding-bottom: 0px;
+	    padding-left: 0px
+	}
+<
+Since it's a CSS, they can be rewritten using shorthand: >
+
+	toolbar button {
+	    margin: -2px 0px;
+	    padding: 0px;
+	}
+
+	notebook tab {
+	    margin: -1px 3px;
+	    padding: 0px
+	}
+<
+Note: You might want to use 'toolbariconsize' to adjust the icon size, too.
+
+Note: Depending on the icon theme and/or the font in use, some extra tweaks
+may be needed for a satisfactory result.
+
+Note: In addition to margin and padding, you can use border.  For details,
+refer to the box model of CSS, e.g.,
+
+	https://www.w3schools.com/css/css_boxmodel.asp
+
+Example 2.  More Than Just Colors ~
+
+GTK+ CSS supports gradients as well: >
+
+	tooltip {
+	    background-image: -gtk-gradient(linear,
+					    0 0, 0 1,
+					    color-stop(0, #344752),
+					    color-stop(0.5, #546772),
+					    color-stop(1, #243742));
+	}
+
+	tooltip label {
+	    color: #f3f3f3;
+	}
+<
+Gradients can be used to make a GUI element visually distinguishable from
+others without relying on high contrast. Accordingly, effective use of them is
+a useful technique to give a theme a sense of unity in color and luminance.
+
+Note: Theming can be difficult since it must make every application look
+equally good; making a single application more charming often gets others
+unexpectedly less attractive or even deteriorates their usability.  Keep this
+in mind always when you try improving a theme.
+
+
+Using Vim as a GTK+ plugin ~
+							*gui-gtk-socketid*
 When the GTK+ version of Vim starts up normally, it creates its own top level
 window (technically, a 'GtkWindow').  GTK+ provides an embedding facility with
 its GtkSocket and GtkPlug widgets.  If one GTK+ application creates a
@@ -425,8 +535,8 @@ Note: Avoid use of --enable-gnome-check with GTK+ 3 GUI build.  The
 functionality mentioned above is consolidated in GTK+ 3.
 
 
-GNOME session support			*gui-gnome-session* *gnome-session*
+GNOME session support ~
-
+					*gui-gnome-session* *gnome-session*
 On logout, Vim shows the well-known exit confirmation dialog if any buffers
 are modified.  Clicking [Cancel] will stop the logout process.  Otherwise the
 current session is stored to disk by using the |:mksession| command, and
@@ -563,7 +673,7 @@ Of these three, Vim uses PRIMARY when reading and writing the "* register
 register.  Vim does not access the SECONDARY selection.
 
 Examples: (assuming the default option values)
-- Select an URL in Visual mode in Vim.  Go to your browser and click the
+- Select a URL in Visual mode in Vim.  Go to your browser and click the
   middle mouse button in the URL text field.  The selected text will be
   inserted (hopefully!).  Note: in Firefox you can set the
   middlemouse.contentLoadURL preference to true in about:config, then the

runtime/doc/if_cscop.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*if_cscop.txt*  For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2011 Jun 12
+*if_cscop.txt*  For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2017 Jun 14
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Andy Kahn
@@ -91,9 +91,10 @@ suggested use.)
 2. Cscope related commands				*cscope-commands*
 
 		*:cscope* *:cs* *:scs* *:scscope* *E259* *E262* *E561* *E560*
-All cscope commands are accessed through suboptions to the main cscope
+All cscope commands are accessed through suboptions to the cscope commands.
-command ":cscope".  The shortest abbreviation is ":cs".  The ":scscope"
+	`:cscope` or `:cs` is the main command
-command does the same and also splits the window (short: "scs").
+	`:scscope` or `:scs` does the same and splits the window
+	`:lcscope` or `:lcs` uses the location list, see |:lcscope|
 
 The available subcommands are:
 

runtime/doc/if_mzsch.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*if_mzsch.txt*  For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2016 Jan 24
+*if_mzsch.txt*  For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2017 Oct 08
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Sergey Khorev
@@ -278,12 +278,15 @@ When you don't use the MzScheme interface you don't need them, thus you can
 use Vim without these DLL files.
 NOTE: Newer version of MzScheme (Racket) require earlier (trampolined)
 initialisation via scheme_main_setup.  So Vim always loads the MzScheme DLL at
-startup if possible.
+startup if possible.  This may make Vim startup slower.
 
 To use the MzScheme interface the MzScheme DLLs must be in your search path.
 In a console window type "path" to see what directories are used.
 
-The names of the DLLs must match the MzScheme version Vim was compiled with.
+On MS-Windows the options 'mzschemedll' and 'mzschemegcdll' are used for the
+name of the library to load.  The initial value is specified at build time.
+
+The version of the DLL must match the MzScheme version Vim was compiled with.
 For MzScheme version 209 they will be "libmzsch209_000.dll" and
 "libmzgc209_000.dll". To know for sure look at the output of the ":version"
 command, look for -DDYNAMIC_MZSCH_DLL="something" and

runtime/doc/if_pyth.txt

@@ -894,10 +894,10 @@ On Ubuntu you will want to install these packages for Python 2:
 	python-dev
 For Python 3:
 	python3
-	pytyon3-dev
+	python3-dev
 For Python 3.6:
 	python3.6
-	pytyon3.6-dev
+	python3.6-dev
 
 If you have more than one version of Python 3, you need to link python3 to the
 one you prefer, before running configure.

runtime/doc/index.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*index.txt*     For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2017 Apr 22
+*index.txt*     For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2017 Aug 02
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -528,8 +528,11 @@ tag		command		   action in Normal mode	~
 |CTRL-W_CTRL-]|	CTRL-W CTRL-]	   same as "CTRL-W ]"
 |CTRL-W_CTRL-^|	CTRL-W CTRL-^	   same as "CTRL-W ^"
 |CTRL-W_CTRL-_|	CTRL-W CTRL-_	   same as "CTRL-W _"
+|CTRL-W_quote|	CTRL-W "	   terminal window: paste register
 |CTRL-W_+|	CTRL-W +	   increase current window height N lines
 |CTRL-W_-|	CTRL-W -	   decrease current window height N lines
+|CTRL-W_.|	CTRL-W .	   terminal window: type CTRL-W
+|CTRL-W_:|	CTRL-W :	   same as |:|, edit a command line
 |CTRL-W_<|	CTRL-W <	   decrease current window width N columns
 |CTRL-W_=|	CTRL-W =	   make all windows the same height & width
 |CTRL-W_>|	CTRL-W >	   increase current window width N columns
@@ -537,6 +540,7 @@ tag		command		   action in Normal mode	~
 |CTRL-W_J|	CTRL-W J	   move current window to the very bottom
 |CTRL-W_K|	CTRL-W K	   move current window to the very top
 |CTRL-W_L|	CTRL-W L	   move current window to the far right
+|CTRL-W_N|	CTRL-W N	   terminal window: go to Terminal Normal mode
 |CTRL-W_P|	CTRL-W P	   go to preview window
 |CTRL-W_R|	CTRL-W R	   rotate windows upwards N times
 |CTRL-W_S|	CTRL-W S	   same as "CTRL-W s"
@@ -1573,18 +1577,23 @@ tag	      command	      action ~
 |:tcldo|	:tcld[o]	execute Tcl command for each line
 |:tclfile|	:tclf[ile]	execute Tcl script file
 |:tearoff|	:te[aroff]	tear-off a menu
+|:terminal|	:ter[minal]	open a terminal window
 |:tfirst|	:tf[irst]	jump to first matching tag
 |:throw|	:th[row]	throw an exception
 |:tjump|	:tj[ump]	like ":tselect", but jump directly when there
 				is only one match
 |:tlast|	:tl[ast]	jump to last matching tag
+|:tmapclear|	:tmapc[lear]	remove all mappings for Terminal-Job mode
+|:tmap|		:tma[p]		like ":map" but for Terminal-Job mode
 |:tmenu|	:tm[enu]	define menu tooltip
 |:tnext|	:tn[ext]	jump to next matching tag
+|:tnoremap|	:tno[remap]	like ":noremap" but for Terminal-Job mode
 |:topleft|	:to[pleft]	make split window appear at top or far left
 |:tprevious|	:tp[revious]	jump to previous matching tag
 |:trewind|	:tr[ewind]	jump to first matching tag
 |:try|		:try		execute commands, abort on error or exception
 |:tselect|	:ts[elect]	list matching tags and select one
+|:tunmap|	:tunma[p]	like ":unmap" but for Terminal-Job mode
 |:tunmenu|	:tu[nmenu]	remove menu tooltip
 |:undo|		:u[ndo]		undo last change(s)
 |:undojoin|	:undoj[oin]	join next change with previous undo block

runtime/doc/intro.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*intro.txt*     For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2016 Sep 24
+*intro.txt*     For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2017 Sep 04
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -143,9 +143,14 @@ There are two ways to report bugs, both work:
 
 Please be brief; all the time that is spent on answering mail is subtracted
 from the time that is spent on improving Vim!  Always give a reproducible
-example and try to find out which settings or other things influence the
+example and try to find out which settings or other things trigger the bug.
-appearance of the bug.  Try different machines, if possible.  Send me patches
+
-if you can!
+Preferably start Vim with: >
+	vim --clean -u reproduce.vim
+Where reproduce.vim is a script that reproduces the problem.  Try different
+machines, if relevant (is this an MS-Windows specific bug perhaps?).
+
+Send me patches if you can!
 
 It will help to include information about the version of Vim you are using and
 your setup.  You can get the information with this command: >
@@ -259,6 +264,10 @@ Vim would never have become what it is now, without the help of these people!
 	Juergen Weigert		Lattice version, AUX improvements, UNIX and
 				MS-DOS ports, autoconf
 	Stefan 'Sec' Zehl	Maintainer of vim.org
+	Yasuhiro Matsumoto	many MS-Windows improvements
+	Ken Takata		fixes and features
+	Kazunobu Kuriyama	GTK 3
+	Christian Brabandt	many fixes, features, user support, etc.
 
 I wish to thank all the people that sent me bug reports and suggestions.  The
 list is too long to mention them all here.  Vim would not be the same without
@@ -525,7 +534,7 @@ examples and use them directly.  Or type them literally, including the '<' and
 ==============================================================================
 5. Modes, introduction				*vim-modes-intro* *vim-modes*
 
-Vim has six BASIC modes:
+Vim has seven BASIC modes:
 
 					*Normal* *Normal-mode* *command-mode*
 Normal mode		In Normal mode you can enter all the normal editor
@@ -561,7 +570,12 @@ Ex mode			Like Command-line mode, but after entering a command
 			you remain in Ex mode.  Very limited editing of the
 			command line.  |Ex-mode|
 
-There are six ADDITIONAL modes.  These are variants of the BASIC modes:
+Terminal-Job mode	Interacting with a job in a terminal window.  Typed
+			keys go to the job and the job output is displayed in
+			the terminal window.  See |terminal| about how to
+			switch to other modes.
+
+There are seven ADDITIONAL modes.  These are variants of the BASIC modes:
 
 				*Operator-pending* *Operator-pending-mode*
 Operator-pending mode	This is like Normal mode, but after an operator
@@ -587,6 +601,10 @@ Insert Normal mode	Entered when CTRL-O given in Insert mode.  This is
 			If the 'showmode' option is on "-- (insert) --" is
 			shown at the bottom of the window.
 
+Terminal-Normal mode	Using Normal mode in a terminal window.  Making
+			changes is impossible.  Use an insert command, such as
+			"a" or "i", to return to Terminal-Job mode.
+
 Insert Visual mode	Entered when starting a Visual selection from Insert
 			mode, e.g., by using CTRL-O and then "v", "V" or
 			CTRL-V.  When the Visual selection ends, Vim returns
@@ -661,6 +679,8 @@ Normal mode from any other mode.  This can be used to make sure Vim is in
 Normal mode, without causing a beep like <Esc> would.  However, this does not
 work in Ex mode.  When used after a command that takes an argument, such as
 |f| or |m|, the timeout set with 'ttimeoutlen' applies.
+When focus is in a terminal window, CTRL-\ CTRL-N goes to Normal mode for only
+one command, see |t_CTRL-\_CTRL-N|.
 
 	*CTRL-\_CTRL-G* *i_CTRL-\_CTRL-G* *c_CTRL-\_CTRL-G* *v_CTRL-\_CTRL-G*
 The command CTRL-\ CTRL-G or <C-\><C-G> can be used to go to Insert mode when
@@ -823,10 +843,12 @@ by Vim.  {Vi: not ok}
 ==============================================================================
 8. Definitions						*definitions*
 
+  buffer		Contains lines of text, usually read from a file.
   screen		The whole area that Vim uses to work in.  This can be
 			a terminal emulator window.  Also called "the Vim
 			window".
-  window		A view on a buffer.
+  window		A view on a buffer.  There can be multiple windows for
+			one buffer.
 
 A screen contains one or more windows, separated by status lines and with the
 command line at the bottom.

runtime/doc/map.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*map.txt*       For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2017 May 30
+*map.txt*       For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2017 Sep 23
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -29,7 +29,7 @@ manual.
 1. Key mapping				*key-mapping* *mapping* *macro*
 
 Key mapping is used to change the meaning of typed keys.  The most common use
-is to define a sequence commands for a function key.  Example: >
+is to define a sequence of commands for a function key.  Example: >
 
 	:map <F2> a<C-R>=strftime("%c")<CR><Esc>
 
@@ -55,6 +55,7 @@ modes.
 :im[ap]	{lhs} {rhs}		|mapmode-i|		*:im* *:imap*
 :lm[ap]	{lhs} {rhs}		|mapmode-l|		*:lm* *:lmap*
 :cm[ap]	{lhs} {rhs}		|mapmode-c|		*:cm* *:cmap*
+:tma[p]	{lhs} {rhs}		|mapmode-t|		*:tma* *:tmap*
 			Map the key sequence {lhs} to {rhs} for the modes
 			where the map command applies.  The result, including
 			{rhs}, is then further scanned for mappings.  This
@@ -71,6 +72,7 @@ modes.
 :ino[remap] {lhs} {rhs}		|mapmode-i|	*:ino* *:inoremap*
 :ln[oremap] {lhs} {rhs}		|mapmode-l|	*:ln*  *:lnoremap*
 :cno[remap] {lhs} {rhs}		|mapmode-c|	*:cno* *:cnoremap*
+:tno[remap] {lhs} {rhs}		|mapmode-t|	*:tno* *:tnoremap*
 			Map the key sequence {lhs} to {rhs} for the modes
 			where the map command applies.  Disallow mapping of
 			{rhs}, to avoid nested and recursive mappings.  Often
@@ -87,6 +89,7 @@ modes.
 :iu[nmap] {lhs}			|mapmode-i|		*:iu*   *:iunmap*
 :lu[nmap] {lhs}			|mapmode-l|		*:lu*   *:lunmap*
 :cu[nmap] {lhs}			|mapmode-c|		*:cu*   *:cunmap*
+:tunma[p] {lhs}			|mapmode-t|		*:tunma* *:tunmap*
 			Remove the mapping of {lhs} for the modes where the
 			map command applies.  The mapping may remain defined
 			for other modes where it applies.
@@ -105,6 +108,7 @@ modes.
 :imapc[lear]			|mapmode-i|		*:imapc*  *:imapclear*
 :lmapc[lear]			|mapmode-l|		*:lmapc*  *:lmapclear*
 :cmapc[lear]			|mapmode-c|		*:cmapc*  *:cmapclear*
+:tmapc[lear]			|mapmode-t|		*:tmapc*  *:tmapclear*
 			Remove ALL mappings for the modes where the map
 			command applies.  {not in Vi}
 			Use the <buffer> argument to remove buffer-local
@@ -121,6 +125,7 @@ modes.
 :im[ap]				|mapmode-i|
 :lm[ap]				|mapmode-l|
 :cm[ap]				|mapmode-c|
+:tma[p]				|mapmode-t|
 			List all key mappings for the modes where the map
 			command applies.  Note that ":map" and ":map!" are
 			used most often, because they include the other modes.
@@ -135,6 +140,7 @@ modes.
 :im[ap] {lhs}			|mapmode-i|		*:imap_l*
 :lm[ap] {lhs}			|mapmode-l|		*:lmap_l*
 :cm[ap] {lhs}			|mapmode-c|		*:cmap_l*
+:tma[p] {lhs}			|mapmode-t|		*:tmap_l*
 			List the key mappings for the key sequences starting
 			with {lhs} in the modes where the map command applies.
 			{not in Vi}
@@ -318,6 +324,7 @@ Overview of which map command works in which mode.  More details below.
 :imap  :inoremap :iunmap    Insert
 :lmap  :lnoremap :lunmap    Insert, Command-line, Lang-Arg
 :cmap  :cnoremap :cunmap    Command-line
+:tmap  :tnoremap :tunmap    Terminal-Job
 
 
     COMMANDS				      MODES ~
@@ -358,6 +365,10 @@ Therefore the ":map" and ":map!" commands enter and display mappings for
 several modes.  In Vim you can use the ":nmap", ":vmap", ":omap", ":cmap" and
 ":imap" commands to enter mappings for each mode separately.
 
+							*mapmode-t*
+The terminal mappings are used in a terminal window, when typing keys for the
+job running in the terminal.  See |terminal-typing|.
+
 							*omap-info*
 Operator-pending mappings can be used to define a movement command that can be
 used with any operator.  Simple example: ":omap { w" makes "y{" work like "yw"
@@ -418,6 +429,7 @@ When listing mappings the characters in the first two columns are:
 	i	Insert
 	l	":lmap" mappings for Insert, Command-line and Lang-Arg
 	c	Command-line
+	t	Terminal-Job
 
 Just before the {rhs} a special character can appear:
 	*	indicates that it is not remappable
@@ -682,7 +694,7 @@ option).  After that it assumes that the 'q' is to be interpreted as such.  If
 you type slowly, or your system is slow, reset the 'timeout' option.  Then you
 might want to set the 'ttimeout' option.
 
-                            				*map-precedence*
+			      				*map-precedence*
 Buffer-local mappings (defined using |:map-<buffer>|) take precedence over
 global mappings.  When a buffer-local mapping is the same as a global mapping,
 Vim will use the buffer-local mapping.  In addition, Vim will use a complete
@@ -1279,6 +1291,7 @@ completion can be enabled:
 	-complete=highlight	highlight groups
 	-complete=history	:history suboptions
 	-complete=locale	locale names (as output of locale -a)
+	-complete=mapclear	buffer argument
 	-complete=mapping	mapping name
 	-complete=menu		menus
 	-complete=messages	|:messages| suboptions
@@ -1414,6 +1427,8 @@ The valid escape sequences are
 	<line1>	The starting line of the command range.
 						*<line2>*
 	<line2>	The final line of the command range.
+						*<range>*
+	<range> The number of items in the command range: 0, 1 or 2
 						*<count>*
 	<count>	Any count supplied (as described for the '-range'
 		and '-count' attributes).

runtime/doc/mbyte.txt

@@ -832,6 +832,9 @@ Use the RPM or port for your system.
 
   Currently, GUI Vim supports three styles, |OverTheSpot|, |OffTheSpot| and
   |Root|.
+  When compiled with |+GUI_GTK| feature, GUI Vim supports two styles,
+  |OnTheSpot| and |OverTheSpot|.  You can select the style with the 'imstyle'
+  option.
 
 *.  on-the-spot						*OnTheSpot*
     Preedit Area and Status Area are performed by the client application in

runtime/doc/message.txt

@@ -463,12 +463,6 @@ changed.  To avoid the message reset the 'warn' option.
 Something inside Vim went wrong and resulted in a NULL pointer.  If you know
 how to reproduce this problem, please report it. |bugs|
 
-							*E172*  >
-  Only one file name allowed
-
-The ":edit" command only accepts one file name.  When you want to specify
-several files for editing use ":next" |:next|.
-
 						*E41* *E82* *E83* *E342*  >
   Out of memory!
   Out of memory!  (allocating {number} bytes)

runtime/doc/options.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*options.txt*	For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2017 Jun 04
+*options.txt*	For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2017 Sep 24
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL	  by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -417,12 +417,23 @@ On Unix systems the form "${HOME}" can be used too.  The name between {} can
 contain non-id characters then.  Note that if you want to use this for the
 "gf" command, you need to add the '{' and '}' characters to 'isfname'.
 
-On MS-Windows, if $HOME is not defined as an environment variable, then
-at runtime Vim will set it to the expansion of $HOMEDRIVE$HOMEPATH.
-
 NOTE: expanding environment variables and "~/" is only done with the ":set"
 command, not when assigning a value to an option with ":let".
 
+							*$HOME-windows*
+On MS-Windows, if $HOME is not defined as an environment variable, then
+at runtime Vim will set it to the expansion of $HOMEDRIVE$HOMEPATH.
+If $HOMEDRIVE is not set then $USERPROFILE is used.
+
+This expanded value is not exported to the environment, this matters when
+running an external command: >
+	:echo system('set | findstr ^HOME=')
+and >
+	:echo luaeval('os.getenv("HOME")')
+should echo nothing (an empty string) despite exists('$HOME') being true.
+When setting $HOME to a non-empty string it will be exported to the
+subprocesses.
+
 
 Note the maximum length of an expanded option is limited.  How much depends on
 the system, mostly it is something like 256 or 1024 characters.
@@ -721,7 +732,8 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 
 	Vim may set this option automatically at startup time when Vim is
 	compiled with the |+termresponse| feature and if |t_u7| is set to the
-	escape sequence to request cursor position report.
+	escape sequence to request cursor position report.  The response can
+	be found in |v:termu7resp|.
 
 			*'antialias'* *'anti'* *'noantialias'* *'noanti'*
 'antialias' 'anti'	boolean (default: off)
@@ -869,11 +881,12 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 <	Vim will guess the value.  In the GUI this should work correctly,
 	in other cases Vim might not be able to guess the right value.
 
-	When the t_BG option is set, Vim will use it to request the background
+	When the |t_RB| option is set, Vim will use it to request the background
 	color from the terminal.  If the returned RGB value is dark/light and
 	'background' is not dark/light, 'background' will be set and the
 	screen is redrawn.  This may have side effects, make t_BG empty in
-	your .vimrc if you suspect this problem.
+	your .vimrc if you suspect this problem.  The response to |t_RB| can
+	be found in |v:termrgbresp|.
 
 	When starting the GUI, the default value for 'background' will be
 	"light".  When the value is not set in the .gvimrc, and Vim detects
@@ -889,6 +902,10 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	"screen.linux", "cygwin" or "putty", or $COLORFGBG suggests a dark
 	background.  Otherwise the default is "light".
 
+	The |:terminal| command and the |term_start()| function use the
+	'background' value to decide whether the terminal window will start
+	with a white or black background.
+
 	Normally this option would be set in the .vimrc file.  Possibly
 	depending on the terminal name.  Example: >
 		:if &term == "pcterm"
@@ -1319,8 +1336,6 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 'bufhidden' 'bh'	string (default: "")
 			local to buffer
 			{not in Vi}
-			{not available when compiled without the |+quickfix|
-			feature}
 	This option specifies what happens when a buffer is no longer
 	displayed in a window:
 	  <empty>	follow the global 'hidden' option
@@ -1355,8 +1370,6 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 'buftype' 'bt'		string (default: "")
 			local to buffer
 			{not in Vi}
-			{not available when compiled without the |+quickfix|
-			feature}
 	The value of this option specifies the type of a buffer:
 	  <empty>	normal buffer
 	  nofile	buffer which is not related to a file and will not be
@@ -1369,6 +1382,8 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 			or list of locations |:lwindow|
 	  help		help buffer (you are not supposed to set this
 			manually)
+	  terminal	buffer for a |terminal| (you are not supposed to set
+			this manually)
 
 	This option is used together with 'bufhidden' and 'swapfile' to
 	specify special kinds of buffers.   See |special-buffers|.
@@ -3522,6 +3537,9 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 		:s///gg		  subst. all	  subst. one
 
 	NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.
+	DEPRECATED: Setting this option may break plugins that are not aware
+	of this option.  Also, many users get confused that adding the /g flag
+	has the opposite effect of that it normally does.
 
 						*'grepformat'* *'gfm'*
 'grepformat' 'gfm'	string	(default "%f:%l:%m,%f:%l%m,%f  %l%m")
@@ -4037,7 +4055,10 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 				     D:DiffDelete,T:DiffText,>:SignColumn,
 				     B:SpellBad,P:SpellCap,R:SpellRare,
 				     L:SpellLocal,-:Conceal,+:Pmenu,=:PmenuSel,
-				     x:PmenuSbar,X:PmenuThumb")
+				     x:PmenuSbar,X:PmenuThumb,*:TabLine,
+				     #:TabLineSel,_:TabLineFill,!:CursorColumn,
+				     .:CursorLine,o:ColorColumn,q:QuickFixLine,
+				     z:StatusLineTerm,Z:StatusLineTermNC")
 			global
 			{not in Vi}
 	This option can be used to set highlighting mode for various
@@ -4096,6 +4117,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 		s	standout	(termcap entry "so" and "se")
 		u	underline	(termcap entry "us" and "ue")
 		c	undercurl	(termcap entry "Cs" and "Ce")
+		t	strikethrough	(termcap entry "Ts" and "Te")
 		n	no highlighting
 		-	no highlighting
 		:	use a highlight group
@@ -4289,7 +4311,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	may change in later releases.
 
 						*'iminsert'* *'imi'*
-'iminsert' 'imi'	number (default 0, 2 when an input method is supported)
+'iminsert' 'imi'	number (default 0)
 			local to buffer
 			{not in Vi}
 	Specifies whether :lmap or an Input Method (IM) is to be used in
@@ -4312,7 +4334,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	methods.  Use 'imdisable' to disable XIM then.
 
 						*'imsearch'* *'ims'*
-'imsearch' 'ims'	number (default 0, 2 when an input method is supported)
+'imsearch' 'ims'	number (default -1)
 			local to buffer
 			{not in Vi}
 	Specifies whether :lmap or an Input Method (IM) is to be used when
@@ -4347,6 +4369,23 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 <
 	NOTE: This function is invoked very often.  Keep it fast.
 
+						*'imstyle'* *'imst'*
+'imstyle' 'imst'	number (default 1)
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+			{only available when compiled with |+xim| and
+			|+GUI_GTK|}
+	This option specifies the input style of Input Method:
+	0   use on-the-spot style
+	1   over-the-spot style
+	See: |xim-input-style|
+
+	For a long time on-the-spot style had been used in the GTK version of
+	vim, however, it is known that it causes troubles when using mappings,
+	|single-repeat|, etc.  Therefore over-the-spot style becomes the
+	default now.  This should work fine for most people, however if you
+	have any problem with it, try using on-the-spot style.
+
 						*'include'* *'inc'*
 'include' 'inc'		string	(default "^\s*#\s*include")
 			global or local to buffer |global-local|
@@ -4961,8 +5000,8 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	When on the plugin scripts are loaded when starting up |load-plugins|.
 	This option can be reset in your |vimrc| file to disable the loading
 	of plugins.
-	Note that using the "-u NONE" and "--noplugin" command line arguments
+	Note that using the "-u NONE", "-u DEFAULTS" and "--noplugin" command
-	reset this option. |-u| |--noplugin|
+	line arguments reset this option.  See |-u| and |--noplugin|.
 
 						*'luadll'*
 'luadll'		string	(default depends on the build)
@@ -5429,6 +5468,31 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	time in msec between two mouse clicks for the second click to be
 	recognized as a multi click.
 
+						*'mzschemedll'*
+'mzschemedll'		string	(default depends on the build)
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+			{only available when compiled with the |+mzscheme/dyn|
+			feature}
+	Specifies the name of the MzScheme shared library. The default is
+	DYNAMIC_MZSCH_DLL which was specified at compile time.
+	Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.
+	This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
+	security reasons.
+
+						*'mzschemegcdll'*
+'mzschemegcdll'		string	(default depends on the build)
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+			{only available when compiled with the |+mzscheme/dyn|
+			feature}
+	Specifies the name of the MzScheme GC shared library. The default is
+	DYNAMIC_MZGC_DLL which was specified at compile time.
+	The value can be equal to 'mzschemedll' if it includes the GC code.
+	Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.
+	This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
+	security reasons.
+
 						    *'mzquantum'* *'mzq'*
 'mzquantum' 'mzq'	number	(default 100)
 			global
@@ -5940,10 +6004,14 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 			{only available when compiled with the |+reltime|
 			feature}
 	The time in milliseconds for redrawing the display.  This applies to
-	searching for patterns for 'hlsearch' and |:match| highlighting.
+	searching for patterns for 'hlsearch', |:match| highlighting an syntax
+	highlighting.
 	When redrawing takes more than this many milliseconds no further
-	matches will be highlighted.  This is used to avoid that Vim hangs
+	matches will be highlighted.
-	when using a very complicated pattern.
+	For syntax highlighting the time applies per window.  When over the
+	limit syntax highlighting is disabled until |CTRL-L| is used.
+	This is used to avoid that Vim hangs when using a very complicated
+	pattern.
 
 						*'regexpengine'* *'re'*
 'regexpengine' 're'	number	(default 0)
@@ -7321,7 +7389,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 
 	Watch out for errors in expressions.  They may render Vim unusable!
 	If you are stuck, hold down ':' or 'Q' to get a prompt, then quit and
-	edit your .vimrc or whatever with "vim -u NONE" to get it right.
+	edit your .vimrc or whatever with "vim --clean" to get it right.
 
 	Examples:
 	Emulate standard status line with 'ruler' set >
@@ -7745,6 +7813,36 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	Note that the "cterm" attributes are still used, not the "gui" ones.
 	NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.
 
+						*'termkey'* *'tk'*
+'termkey' 'tk'		string	(default "")
+			local to window
+			{not in Vi}
+	The key that starts a CTRL-W command in a terminal window.  Other keys
+	are sent to the job running in the window.
+	The <> notation can be used, e.g.: >
+		:set termkey=<C-L>
+<	The string must be one key stroke but can be multiple bytes.
+	When not set CTRL-W is used, so that CTRL-W : gets you to the command
+	line.  If 'termkey' is set to CTRL-L then CTRL-L : gets you to the
+	command line.
+
+						*'termsize'* *'tms'*
+'termsize' 'tms'	string	(default "")
+			local to window
+			{not in Vi}
+	Size of the |terminal| window.  Format: {rows}x{columns}.
+	- When empty the terminal gets the size from the window.
+	- When set (e.g., "24x80") the terminal size is not adjusted to the
+	  window size.  If the window is smaller only the top-left part is
+	  displayed.
+	  When rows is zero then use the height of the window.
+	  When columns is zero then use the width of the window.
+	  For example: "30x0" uses 30 rows with the current window width.
+	  Using "0x0" is the same as empty.
+	Note that the command running in the terminal window may still change
+	the size of the terminal.  In that case the Vim window will be
+	adjusted to that size, if possible.
+
 						*'terse'* *'noterse'*
 'terse'			boolean	(default off)
 			global
@@ -8186,7 +8284,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	Save the whole buffer for undo when reloading it.  This applies to the
 	":e!" command and reloading for when the buffer changed outside of
 	Vim. |FileChangedShell|
-	The save only happens when this options is negative or when the number
+	The save only happens when this option is negative or when the number
 	of lines is smaller than the value of this option.
 	Set this option to zero to disable undo for a reload.
 
@@ -8304,13 +8402,14 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 			{not available when compiled without the |+viminfo|
 			feature}
 	When non-empty, the viminfo file is read upon startup and written
-	when exiting Vim (see |viminfo-file|).  The string should be a comma
+	when exiting Vim (see |viminfo-file|). Except when 'viminfofile' is
-	separated list of parameters, each consisting of a single character
+	"NONE".
-	identifying the particular parameter, followed by a number or string
+	The string should be a comma separated list of parameters, each
-	which specifies the value of that parameter.  If a particular
+	consisting of a single character identifying the particular parameter,
-	character is left out, then the default value is used for that
+	followed by a number or string which specifies the value of that
-	parameter.  The following is a list of the identifying characters and
+	parameter.  If a particular character is left out, then the default
-	the effect of their value.
+	value is used for that parameter.  The following is a list of the
+	identifying characters and the effect of their value.
 	CHAR	VALUE	~
 							*viminfo-!*
 	!	When included, save and restore global variables that start
@@ -8370,9 +8469,9 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 		has been used since the last search command.
 							*viminfo-n*
 	n	Name of the viminfo file.  The name must immediately follow
-		the 'n'.  Must be at the end of the option!  If the "-i"
+		the 'n'.  Must be at the end of the option!  If the
-		argument was given when starting Vim, that file name overrides
+		'viminfofile' option is set, that file name overrides the one
-		the one given here with 'viminfo'.  Environment variables are
+		given here with 'viminfo'.  Environment variables are
 		expanded when opening the file, not when setting the option.
 							*viminfo-r*
 	r	Removable media.  The argument is a string (up to the next
@@ -8413,6 +8512,17 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	NOTE: This option is set to the Vim default value when 'compatible'
 	is reset.
 
+				*'viminfofile'* *'vif'*
+'viminfofile' 'vif'	string	(default: "")
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+			{not available when compiled without the |+viminfo|
+			feature}
+	When non-empty, overrides the file name used for viminfo.
+	When equal to "NONE" no viminfo file will be read or written.
+	This option can be set with the |-i| command line flag.  The |--clean|
+	command line flag sets it to "NONE".
+
 					    *'virtualedit'* *'ve'*
 'virtualedit' 've'	string	(default "")
 			global
@@ -8446,14 +8556,27 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 'visualbell' 'vb'	boolean	(default off)
 			global
 			{not in Vi}
-	Use visual bell instead of beeping.  The terminal code to display the
+	Use a visual bell instead of beeping.  The terminal code to display the
 	visual bell is given with 't_vb'.  When no beep or flash is wanted,
-	use ":set vb t_vb=".
+	use: >
-	Note: When the GUI starts, 't_vb' is reset to its default value.  You
+		:set vb t_vb=
-	might want to set it again in your |gvimrc|.
+<	If you want a short flash, you can use this on many terminals: >
+		:set vb t_vb=[?5h$<100>[?5l
+<	Here $<100> specifies the time, you can use a smaller or bigger value
+	to get a shorter or longer flash.
+
+	Note: Vim will limit the bell to once per half a second.  This avoids
+	having to wait for the flashing to finish when there are lots of
+	bells, e.g. on key repeat.  This also happens without 'visualbell'
+	set.
+
 	In the GUI, 't_vb' defaults to "<Esc>|f", which inverts the display
 	for 20 msec.  If you want to use a different time, use "<Esc>|40f",
 	where 40 is the time in msec.
+
+	Note: When the GUI starts, 't_vb' is reset to its default value.  You
+	might want to set it again in your |gvimrc|.
+
 	Does not work on the Amiga, you always get a screen flash.
 	Also see 'errorbells'.
 
@@ -8768,6 +8891,20 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	large number, it will cause errors when opening more than a few
 	windows.  A value of 0 to 12 is reasonable.
 
+						*'winptydll'*
+'winptydll'		string	(default "winpty32.dll" or "winpty64.dll")
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+			{only available when compiled with the |terminal|
+			feature on MS-Windows}
+	Specifies the name of the winpty shared library, used for the
+	|:terminal| command. The default depends on whether was build as a
+	32-bit or 64-bit executable.  If not found, "winpty.dll" is tried as
+	a fallback.
+	Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.
+	This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
+	security reasons.
+
 						*'winwidth'* *'wiw'* *E592*
 'winwidth' 'wiw'	number	(default 20)
 			global

runtime/doc/pattern.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*pattern.txt*   For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2017 Mar 29
+*pattern.txt*   For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2017 Jun 05
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -1076,12 +1076,16 @@ x	A single character, with no special meaning, matches itself
 	":s/[/x/" searches for "[/x" and replaces it with nothing.  It does
 	not search for "[" and replaces it with "x"!
 
+								*E944* *E945*
 	If the sequence begins with "^", it matches any single character NOT
 	in the collection: "[^xyz]" matches anything but 'x', 'y' and 'z'.
 	- If two characters in the sequence are separated by '-', this is
 	  shorthand for the full list of ASCII characters between them.  E.g.,
-	  "[0-9]" matches any decimal digit.  Non-ASCII characters can be
+	  "[0-9]" matches any decimal digit. If the starting character exceeds
-	  used, but the character values must not be more than 256 apart.
+	  the ending character, e.g. [c-a], E944 occurs. Non-ASCII characters
+	  can be used, but the character values must not be more than 256 apart
+	  in the old regexp engine. For example, searching by [\u3000-\u4000]
+	  after setting re=1 emits a E945 error. Prepending \%#=2 will fix it.
 	- A character class expression is evaluated to the set of characters
 	  belonging to that character class.  The following character classes
 	  are supported:

runtime/doc/pi_getscript.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*pi_getscript.txt*  For Vim version 7.0.  Last change: 2013 Nov 29
+*pi_getscript.txt*  For Vim version 7.0.  Last change: 2017 Aug 01
 >
 		GETSCRIPT REFERENCE MANUAL  by Charles E. Campbell
 <
@@ -389,7 +389,7 @@ v36 Apr 22, 2013 : * (glts) suggested use of plugin/**/*.vim instead of
 		     plugin/*.vim in globpath() call.
 		   * (Andy Wokula) got warning message when setting
 		     g:loaded_getscriptPlugin
-v35 Apr 07, 2012 : * (MengHuan Yu) pointed out that the script url has
+v35 Apr 07, 2012 : * (MengHuan Yu) pointed out that the script URL has
 		     changed (somewhat).  However, it doesn't work, and
 		     the original one does (under Linux). I'll make it
 		     yet-another-option.

runtime/doc/quickfix.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*quickfix.txt*  For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2017 Mar 06
+*quickfix.txt*  For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2017 Sep 13
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -44,6 +44,13 @@ From inside Vim an easy way to run a command and handle the output is with the
 The 'errorformat' option should be set to match the error messages from your
 compiler (see |errorformat| below).
 
+							*quickfix-ID*
+Each quickfix list has a unique identifier called the quickfix ID and this
+number will not change within a Vim session. The getqflist() function can be
+used to get the identifier assigned to a list. There is also a quickfix list
+number which may change whenever more than ten lists are added to a quickfix
+stack.
+
 						*location-list* *E776*
 A location list is a window-local quickfix list. You get one after commands
 like `:lvimgrep`, `:lgrep`, `:lhelpgrep`, `:lmake`, etc., which create a
@@ -425,7 +432,9 @@ EXECUTE A COMMAND IN ALL THE BUFFERS IN QUICKFIX OR LOCATION LIST:
 			which will indicate the command that produced the
 			quickfix list. This can be used to compose a custom
 			status line if the value of 'statusline' is adjusted
-			properly.
+			properly. Whenever this buffer is modified by a
+			quickfix command or function, the |b:changedtick|
+			variable is incremented.
 
 							*:lop* *:lopen*
 :lop[en] [height]	Open a window to show the location list for the
@@ -472,7 +481,11 @@ keep its height, ignoring 'winheight' and 'equalalways'.  You can change the
 height manually (e.g., by dragging the status line above it with the mouse).
 
 In the quickfix window, each line is one error.  The line number is equal to
-the error number.  You can use ":.cc" to jump to the error under the cursor.
+the error number.  The current entry is highlighted with the QuickFixLine
+highlighting.  You can change it to your liking, e.g.: >
+	:hi QuickFixLine ctermbg=Yellow guibg=Yellow
+
+You can use ":.cc" to jump to the error under the cursor.
 Hitting the <Enter> key or double-clicking the mouse on a line has the same
 effect.  The file containing the error is opened in the window above the
 quickfix window.  If there already is a window for that file, it is used

runtime/doc/quickref.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*quickref.txt*  For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2016 Dec 16
+*quickref.txt*  For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2017 Sep 10
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -749,6 +749,7 @@ Short explanation of each option:		*option-list*
 'iminsert'	  'imi'     use :lmap or IM in Insert mode
 'imsearch'	  'ims'     use :lmap or IM when typing a search pattern
 'imstatusfunc'    'imsf'    function to obtain X input method status
+'imstyle'	  'imst'    specifies the input style of the input method
 'include'	  'inc'     pattern to be used to find an include file
 'includeexpr'	  'inex'    expression used to process an include line
 'incsearch'	  'is'	    highlight match while typing search pattern
@@ -920,6 +921,8 @@ Short explanation of each option:		*option-list*
 'termbidi'	  'tbidi'   terminal takes care of bi-directionality
 'termencoding'	  'tenc'    character encoding used by the terminal
 'termguicolors'	  'tgc'     use GUI colors for the terminal
+'termkey'	  'tk'	    key that precedes a Vim command in a terminal
+'termsize'	  'tms'	    size of a terminal window
 'terse'			    shorten some messages
 'textauto'	  'ta'	    obsolete, use 'fileformats'
 'textmode'	  'tx'	    obsolete, use 'fileformat'
@@ -952,6 +955,7 @@ Short explanation of each option:		*option-list*
 'viewdir'	  'vdir'    directory where to store files with :mkview
 'viewoptions'	  'vop'     specifies what to save for :mkview
 'viminfo'	  'vi'	    use .viminfo file upon startup and exiting
+'viminfofile'	  'vif'	    file name used for the viminfo file
 'virtualedit'	  've'	    when to use virtual editing
 'visualbell'	  'vb'	    use visual bell instead of beeping
 'warn'			    warn for shell command when buffer was changed
@@ -971,6 +975,7 @@ Short explanation of each option:		*option-list*
 'winfixwidth'	  'wfw'     keep window width when opening/closing windows
 'winminheight'	  'wmh'     minimum number of lines for any window
 'winminwidth'	  'wmw'     minimal number of columns for any window
+'winptydll'		    name of the winpty dynamic library
 'winwidth'	  'wiw'     minimal number of columns for current window
 'wrap'			    long lines wrap and continue on the next line
 'wrapmargin'	  'wm'	    chars from the right where wrapping starts
@@ -1309,6 +1314,7 @@ Context-sensitive completion on the command-line:
 
 |:sfind|	:sf[ind] {file}		split window, find {file} in 'path'
 					   and edit it
+|:terminal|	:terminal {cmd}		open a terminal window
 |CTRL-W_]|	CTRL-W ]		split window and jump to tag under
 					   cursor
 |CTRL-W_f|	CTRL-W f		split window and edit file name under

runtime/doc/remote.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*remote.txt*    For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2017 Mar 18
+*remote.txt*    For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2017 Aug 01
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -99,7 +99,7 @@ Tell the remote server "BLA" to write all files and exit: >
     vim --servername BLA --remote-send '<C-\><C-N>:wqa<CR>'
 
 
-SERVER NAME
+SERVER NAME						*client-server-name*
 
 By default Vim will try to register the name under which it was invoked (gvim,
 egvim ...).  This can be overridden with the --servername argument.  If the

runtime/doc/repeat.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*repeat.txt*    For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2017 Feb 06
+*repeat.txt*    For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2017 Jun 10
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -46,7 +46,7 @@ of area is used, see |visual-repeat|.
 ==============================================================================
 2. Multiple repeats					*multi-repeat*
 
-						*:g* *:global* *E147* *E148*
+						*:g* *:global* *E148*
 :[range]g[lobal]/{pattern}/[cmd]
 			Execute the Ex command [cmd] (default ":p") on the
 			lines within [range] where {pattern} matches.
@@ -79,8 +79,15 @@ The default for [range] is the whole buffer (1,$).  Use "CTRL-C" to interrupt
 the command.  If an error message is given for a line, the command for that
 line is aborted and the global command continues with the next marked or
 unmarked line.
+								*E147* 
+When the command is used recursively, it only works on one line.  Giving a
+range is then not allowed. This is useful to find all lines that match a
+pattern and do not match another pattern: >
+	:g/found/v/notfound/{cmd}
+This first finds all lines containing "found", but only executes {cmd} when
+there is no match for "notfound".
 
-To repeat a non-Ex command, you can use the ":normal" command: >
+To execute a non-Ex command, you can use the `:normal` command: >
 	:g/pat/normal {commands}
 Make sure that {commands} ends with a whole command, otherwise Vim will wait
 for you to type the rest of the command for each match.  The screen will not

runtime/doc/starting.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*starting.txt*  For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2017 Jan 15
+*starting.txt*  For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2017 Jul 15
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -140,11 +140,12 @@ a slash.  Thus "-R" means recovery and "-/R" readonly.
 --noplugin	Skip loading plugins.  Resets the 'loadplugins' option.
 		{not in Vi}
 		Note that the |-u| argument may also disable loading plugins:
-			argument	load vimrc files	load plugins ~
+			argument   load: vimrc files  plugins  defaults.vim ~
-			(nothing)		yes		    yes
+			(nothing)	     yes	yes	  yes
-			-u NONE			no		    no
+			-u NONE		     no		no	  no
-			-u NORC			no		    yes
+			-u DEFAULTS	     no		no	  yes
-			--noplugin		yes		    no
+			-u NORC		     no		yes	  no
+			--noplugin	     yes	no	  yes
 
 --startuptime {fname}					*--startuptime*
 		During startup write timing messages to the file {fname}.
@@ -465,21 +466,30 @@ a slash.  Thus "-R" means recovery and "-/R" readonly.
 --nofork	GUI: Do not fork.  Same as |-f|.
 							*-u* *E282*
 -u {vimrc}	The file {vimrc} is read for initializations.  Most other
-		initializations are skipped; see |initialization|.  This can
+		initializations are skipped; see |initialization|.
-		be used to start Vim in a special mode, with special
+
+		This can be used to start Vim in a special mode, with special
 		mappings and settings.  A shell alias can be used to make
 		this easy to use.  For example: >
 			alias vimc vim -u ~/.c_vimrc !*
 <		Also consider using autocommands; see |autocommand|.
+
 		When {vimrc} is equal to "NONE" (all uppercase), all
 		initializations from files and environment variables are
 		skipped, including reading the |gvimrc| file when the GUI
 		starts.  Loading plugins is also skipped.
+
 		When {vimrc} is equal to "NORC" (all uppercase), this has the
 		same effect as "NONE", but loading plugins is not skipped.
-		Using the "-u" argument has the side effect that the
+
-		'compatible' option will be on by default.  This can have
+		When {vimrc} is equal to "DEFAULTS" (all uppercase), this has
-		unexpected effects.  See |'compatible'|.
+		the same effect as "NONE", but the |defaults.vim| script is
+		loaded, which will also set 'nocompatible'.
+
+		Using the "-u" argument with another argument than DEFAULTS
+		has the side effect that the 'compatible' option will be on by
+		default.  This can have unexpected effects.  See
+		|'compatible'|.
 		{not in Vi}
 
 							*-U* *E230*
@@ -497,6 +507,13 @@ a slash.  Thus "-R" means recovery and "-/R" readonly.
 		":rv" or ":wv" are used.  See also |viminfo-file|.
 		{not in Vi}
 
+							*--clean*
+--clean		Equal to "-u DEFAULTS -i NONE":
+		- initializations from files and environment variables is
+		  skipped
+		- the |defaults.vim| script is loaded, which implies
+		  'nocompatible': use Vim defaults
+		- no viminfo file is read or written
 							*-x*
 -x		Use encryption to read/write files.  Will prompt for a key,
 		which is then stored in the 'key' option.  All writes will
@@ -868,6 +885,7 @@ accordingly.  Vim proceeds in this order:
 	Loading plugins won't be done when:
 	- The 'loadplugins' option was reset in a vimrc file.
 	- The |--noplugin| command line argument is used.
+	- The |--clean| command line argument is used.
 	- The "-u NONE" command line argument is used |-u|.
 	- When Vim was compiled without the |+eval| feature.
 	Note that using "-c 'set noloadplugins'" doesn't work, because the
@@ -990,6 +1008,7 @@ starts its initializations.  But as soon as:
 - a vimrc file in the current directory, or
 - the "VIMINIT" environment variable is set, or
 - the "-N" command line argument is given, or
+- the "--clean" command line argument is given, or
   even when no vimrc file exists.
 - the |defaults.vim| script is loaded, or
 - gvimrc file was found,

runtime/doc/syntax.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*syntax.txt*	For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2017 Jun 04
+*syntax.txt*	For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2017 Aug 12
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL	  by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -2138,6 +2138,16 @@ set "msql_minlines" to the value you desire.  Example: >
 	:let msql_minlines = 200
 
 
+N1QL						*n1ql.vim* *ft-n1ql-syntax*
+
+N1QL is a SQL-like declarative language for manipulating JSON documents in
+Couchbase Server databases.
+
+Vim syntax highlights N1QL statements, keywords, operators, types, comments,
+and special values.  Vim ignores syntactical elements specific to SQL or its
+many dialects, like COLUMN or CHAR, that don't exist in N1QL.
+
+
 NCF						*ncf.vim* *ft-ncf-syntax*
 
 There is one option for NCF syntax highlighting.
@@ -4689,23 +4699,26 @@ the same syntax file on all terminals, and use the optimal highlighting.
 
 					*bold* *underline* *undercurl*
 					*inverse* *italic* *standout*
+					*nocombine* *strikethrough*
 term={attr-list}			*attr-list* *highlight-term* *E418*
 	attr-list is a comma separated list (without spaces) of the
 	following items (in any order):
 		bold
 		underline
 		undercurl	not always available
+		strikethrough	not always available
 		reverse
 		inverse		same as reverse
 		italic
 		standout
+		nocombine	override attributes instead of combining them
 		NONE		no attributes used (used to reset it)
 
 	Note that "bold" can be used here and by using a bold font.  They
 	have the same effect.
 	"undercurl" is a curly underline.  When "undercurl" is not possible
-	then "underline" is used.  In general "undercurl" is only available in
+	then "underline" is used.  In general "undercurl" and "strikethrough"
-	the GUI.  The color is set with |highlight-guisp|.
+	is only available in the GUI.  The color is set with |highlight-guisp|.
 
 start={term-list}				*highlight-start* *E422*
 stop={term-list}				*term-list* *highlight-stop*
@@ -4870,7 +4883,8 @@ guifg={color-name}					*highlight-guifg*
 guibg={color-name}					*highlight-guibg*
 guisp={color-name}					*highlight-guisp*
 	These give the foreground (guifg), background (guibg) and special
-	(guisp) color to use in the GUI.  "guisp" is used for undercurl.
+	(guisp) color to use in the GUI.  "guisp" is used for undercurl and
+	strikethrough.
 	There are a few special names:
 		NONE		no color (transparent)
 		bg		use normal background color
@@ -4982,10 +4996,11 @@ PmenuSbar	Popup menu: scrollbar.
 PmenuThumb	Popup menu: Thumb of the scrollbar.
 							*hl-Question*
 Question	|hit-enter| prompt and yes/no questions
+							*hl-QuickFixLine*
+QuickFixLine	Current |quickfix| item in the quickfix window.
 							*hl-Search*
 Search		Last search pattern highlighting (see 'hlsearch').
-		Also used for highlighting the current line in the quickfix
+		Also used for similar items that need to stand out.
-		window and similar items that need to stand out.
 							*hl-SpecialKey*
 SpecialKey	Meta and special keys listed with ":map", also for text used
 		to show unprintable characters in the text, 'listchars'.

runtime/doc/tags

@@ -4,6 +4,7 @@
 $	motion.txt	/*$*
 $HOME	options.txt	/*$HOME*
 $HOME-use	version5.txt	/*$HOME-use*
+$HOME-windows	options.txt	/*$HOME-windows*
 $MYGVIMRC	gui.txt	/*$MYGVIMRC*
 $MYVIMRC	starting.txt	/*$MYVIMRC*
 $VIM	starting.txt	/*$VIM*
@@ -366,7 +367,9 @@ $VIM_POSIX	vi_diff.txt	/*$VIM_POSIX*
 'ims'	options.txt	/*'ims'*
 'imsearch'	options.txt	/*'imsearch'*
 'imsf'	options.txt	/*'imsf'*
+'imst'	options.txt	/*'imst'*
 'imstatusfunc'	options.txt	/*'imstatusfunc'*
+'imstyle'	options.txt	/*'imstyle'*
 'inc'	options.txt	/*'inc'*
 'include'	options.txt	/*'include'*
 'includeexpr'	options.txt	/*'includeexpr'*
@@ -935,6 +938,7 @@ $VIM_POSIX	vi_diff.txt	/*$VIM_POSIX*
 't_Co'	term.txt	/*'t_Co'*
 't_Cs'	term.txt	/*'t_Cs'*
 't_DL'	term.txt	/*'t_DL'*
+'t_EC'	term.txt	/*'t_EC'*
 't_EI'	term.txt	/*'t_EI'*
 't_F1'	term.txt	/*'t_F1'*
 't_F2'	term.txt	/*'t_F2'*
@@ -971,12 +975,19 @@ $VIM_POSIX	vi_diff.txt	/*$VIM_POSIX*
 't_PE'	term.txt	/*'t_PE'*
 't_PS'	term.txt	/*'t_PS'*
 't_RB'	term.txt	/*'t_RB'*
+'t_RC'	term.txt	/*'t_RC'*
 't_RI'	term.txt	/*'t_RI'*
+'t_RS'	term.txt	/*'t_RS'*
 't_RV'	term.txt	/*'t_RV'*
+'t_SC'	term.txt	/*'t_SC'*
+'t_SH'	term.txt	/*'t_SH'*
 't_SI'	term.txt	/*'t_SI'*
 't_SR'	term.txt	/*'t_SR'*
 't_Sb'	term.txt	/*'t_Sb'*
 't_Sf'	term.txt	/*'t_Sf'*
+'t_Te'	term.txt	/*'t_Te'*
+'t_Ts'	term.txt	/*'t_Ts'*
+'t_VS'	term.txt	/*'t_VS'*
 't_WP'	term.txt	/*'t_WP'*
 't_WS'	term.txt	/*'t_WS'*
 't_ZH'	term.txt	/*'t_ZH'*
@@ -1064,6 +1075,8 @@ $VIM_POSIX	vi_diff.txt	/*$VIM_POSIX*
 'termbidi'	options.txt	/*'termbidi'*
 'termencoding'	options.txt	/*'termencoding'*
 'termguicolors'	options.txt	/*'termguicolors'*
+'termkey'	options.txt	/*'termkey'*
+'termsize'	options.txt	/*'termsize'*
 'terse'	options.txt	/*'terse'*
 'textauto'	options.txt	/*'textauto'*
 'textmode'	options.txt	/*'textmode'*
@@ -1079,8 +1092,10 @@ $VIM_POSIX	vi_diff.txt	/*$VIM_POSIX*
 'titlelen'	options.txt	/*'titlelen'*
 'titleold'	options.txt	/*'titleold'*
 'titlestring'	options.txt	/*'titlestring'*
+'tk'	options.txt	/*'tk'*
 'tl'	options.txt	/*'tl'*
 'tm'	options.txt	/*'tm'*
+'tms'	options.txt	/*'tms'*
 'to'	options.txt	/*'to'*
 'toolbar'	options.txt	/*'toolbar'*
 'toolbariconsize'	options.txt	/*'toolbariconsize'*
@@ -1124,7 +1139,9 @@ $VIM_POSIX	vi_diff.txt	/*$VIM_POSIX*
 'vi'	options.txt	/*'vi'*
 'viewdir'	options.txt	/*'viewdir'*
 'viewoptions'	options.txt	/*'viewoptions'*
+'vif'	options.txt	/*'vif'*
 'viminfo'	options.txt	/*'viminfo'*
+'viminfofile'	options.txt	/*'viminfofile'*
 'virtualedit'	options.txt	/*'virtualedit'*
 'visualbell'	options.txt	/*'visualbell'*
 'vop'	options.txt	/*'vop'*
@@ -1161,6 +1178,7 @@ $VIM_POSIX	vi_diff.txt	/*$VIM_POSIX*
 'winheight'	options.txt	/*'winheight'*
 'winminheight'	options.txt	/*'winminheight'*
 'winminwidth'	options.txt	/*'winminwidth'*
+'winptydll'	options.txt	/*'winptydll'*
 'winwidth'	options.txt	/*'winwidth'*
 'wiv'	options.txt	/*'wiv'*
 'wiw'	options.txt	/*'wiw'*
@@ -1309,6 +1327,7 @@ $VIM_POSIX	vi_diff.txt	/*$VIM_POSIX*
 +tcl	various.txt	/*+tcl*
 +tcl/dyn	various.txt	/*+tcl\/dyn*
 +termguicolors	various.txt	/*+termguicolors*
++terminal	various.txt	/*+terminal*
 +terminfo	various.txt	/*+terminfo*
 +termresponse	various.txt	/*+termresponse*
 +textobjects	various.txt	/*+textobjects*
@@ -1316,6 +1335,7 @@ $VIM_POSIX	vi_diff.txt	/*$VIM_POSIX*
 +timers	various.txt	/*+timers*
 +title	various.txt	/*+title*
 +toolbar	various.txt	/*+toolbar*
++unix	eval.txt	/*+unix*
 +user_commands	various.txt	/*+user_commands*
 +vertsplit	various.txt	/*+vertsplit*
 +viminfo	various.txt	/*+viminfo*
@@ -1344,6 +1364,7 @@ $VIM_POSIX	vi_diff.txt	/*$VIM_POSIX*
 -+rv	gui_x11.txt	/*-+rv*
 --	starting.txt	/*--*
 ---	starting.txt	/*---*
+--clean	starting.txt	/*--clean*
 --cmd	starting.txt	/*--cmd*
 --echo-wid	starting.txt	/*--echo-wid*
 --help	starting.txt	/*--help*
@@ -1879,6 +1900,7 @@ $VIM_POSIX	vi_diff.txt	/*$VIM_POSIX*
 :<afile>	cmdline.txt	/*:<afile>*
 :<amatch>	cmdline.txt	/*:<amatch>*
 :<cWORD>	cmdline.txt	/*:<cWORD>*
+:<cexpr>	cmdline.txt	/*:<cexpr>*
 :<cfile>	cmdline.txt	/*:<cfile>*
 :<cword>	cmdline.txt	/*:<cword>*
 :<sfile>	cmdline.txt	/*:<sfile>*
@@ -1938,6 +1960,7 @@ $VIM_POSIX	vi_diff.txt	/*$VIM_POSIX*
 :Sexplore	pi_netrw.txt	/*:Sexplore*
 :TOhtml	syntax.txt	/*:TOhtml*
 :TarDiff	pi_tar.txt	/*:TarDiff*
+:Termdebug	terminal.txt	/*:Termdebug*
 :Texplore	pi_netrw.txt	/*:Texplore*
 :UseVimball	pi_vimball.txt	/*:UseVimball*
 :Vexplore	pi_netrw.txt	/*:Vexplore*
@@ -3098,6 +3121,8 @@ $VIM_POSIX	vi_diff.txt	/*$VIM_POSIX*
 :tclfile	if_tcl.txt	/*:tclfile*
 :te	gui_w32.txt	/*:te*
 :tearoff	gui_w32.txt	/*:tearoff*
+:ter	terminal.txt	/*:ter*
+:terminal	terminal.txt	/*:terminal*
 :tf	tagsrch.txt	/*:tf*
 :tfirst	tagsrch.txt	/*:tfirst*
 :th	eval.txt	/*:th*
@@ -3107,9 +3132,16 @@ $VIM_POSIX	vi_diff.txt	/*$VIM_POSIX*
 :tl	tagsrch.txt	/*:tl*
 :tlast	tagsrch.txt	/*:tlast*
 :tm	gui.txt	/*:tm*
+:tma	map.txt	/*:tma*
+:tmap	map.txt	/*:tmap*
+:tmap_l	map.txt	/*:tmap_l*
+:tmapc	map.txt	/*:tmapc*
+:tmapclear	map.txt	/*:tmapclear*
 :tmenu	gui.txt	/*:tmenu*
 :tn	tagsrch.txt	/*:tn*
 :tnext	tagsrch.txt	/*:tnext*
+:tno	map.txt	/*:tno*
+:tnoremap	map.txt	/*:tnoremap*
 :topleft	windows.txt	/*:topleft*
 :tp	tagsrch.txt	/*:tp*
 :tprevious	tagsrch.txt	/*:tprevious*
@@ -3119,6 +3151,8 @@ $VIM_POSIX	vi_diff.txt	/*$VIM_POSIX*
 :ts	tagsrch.txt	/*:ts*
 :tselect	tagsrch.txt	/*:tselect*
 :tu	gui.txt	/*:tu*
+:tunma	map.txt	/*:tunma*
+:tunmap	map.txt	/*:tunmap*
 :tunmenu	gui.txt	/*:tunmenu*
 :u	undo.txt	/*:u*
 :un	undo.txt	/*:un*
@@ -3383,6 +3417,7 @@ $VIM_POSIX	vi_diff.txt	/*$VIM_POSIX*
 <bang>	map.txt	/*<bang>*
 <buffer=N>	autocmd.txt	/*<buffer=N>*
 <buffer=abuf>	autocmd.txt	/*<buffer=abuf>*
+<cexpr>	cmdline.txt	/*<cexpr>*
 <cfile>	cmdline.txt	/*<cfile>*
 <character>	intro.txt	/*<character>*
 <count>	map.txt	/*<count>*
@@ -3413,6 +3448,7 @@ $VIM_POSIX	vi_diff.txt	/*$VIM_POSIX*
 <mods>	map.txt	/*<mods>*
 <nomodeline>	autocmd.txt	/*<nomodeline>*
 <q-args>	map.txt	/*<q-args>*
+<range>	map.txt	/*<range>*
 <reg>	map.txt	/*<reg>*
 <register>	map.txt	/*<register>*
 <sfile>	cmdline.txt	/*<sfile>*
@@ -3526,6 +3562,8 @@ CTRL-V-alternative	gui_w32.txt	/*CTRL-V-alternative*
 CTRL-W	index.txt	/*CTRL-W*
 CTRL-W_+	windows.txt	/*CTRL-W_+*
 CTRL-W_-	windows.txt	/*CTRL-W_-*
+CTRL-W_.	terminal.txt	/*CTRL-W_.*
+CTRL-W_:	windows.txt	/*CTRL-W_:*
 CTRL-W_<	windows.txt	/*CTRL-W_<*
 CTRL-W_<BS>	windows.txt	/*CTRL-W_<BS>*
 CTRL-W_<CR>	quickfix.txt	/*CTRL-W_<CR>*
@@ -3564,6 +3602,7 @@ CTRL-W_H	windows.txt	/*CTRL-W_H*
 CTRL-W_J	windows.txt	/*CTRL-W_J*
 CTRL-W_K	windows.txt	/*CTRL-W_K*
 CTRL-W_L	windows.txt	/*CTRL-W_L*
+CTRL-W_N	terminal.txt	/*CTRL-W_N*
 CTRL-W_P	windows.txt	/*CTRL-W_P*
 CTRL-W_R	windows.txt	/*CTRL-W_R*
 CTRL-W_S	windows.txt	/*CTRL-W_S*
@@ -3591,6 +3630,7 @@ CTRL-W_n	windows.txt	/*CTRL-W_n*
 CTRL-W_o	windows.txt	/*CTRL-W_o*
 CTRL-W_p	windows.txt	/*CTRL-W_p*
 CTRL-W_q	windows.txt	/*CTRL-W_q*
+CTRL-W_quote	terminal.txt	/*CTRL-W_quote*
 CTRL-W_r	windows.txt	/*CTRL-W_r*
 CTRL-W_s	windows.txt	/*CTRL-W_s*
 CTRL-W_t	windows.txt	/*CTRL-W_t*
@@ -4519,6 +4559,11 @@ E940	eval.txt	/*E940*
 E941	eval.txt	/*E941*
 E942	eval.txt	/*E942*
 E943	message.txt	/*E943*
+E944	pattern.txt	/*E944*
+E945	pattern.txt	/*E945*
+E946	terminal.txt	/*E946*
+E947	terminal.txt	/*E947*
+E948	terminal.txt	/*E948*
 E95	message.txt	/*E95*
 E96	diff.txt	/*E96*
 E97	diff.txt	/*E97*
@@ -4760,6 +4805,7 @@ TabNew	autocmd.txt	/*TabNew*
 Tcl	if_tcl.txt	/*Tcl*
 TermChanged	autocmd.txt	/*TermChanged*
 TermResponse	autocmd.txt	/*TermResponse*
+Terminal-mode	terminal.txt	/*Terminal-mode*
 TextChanged	autocmd.txt	/*TextChanged*
 TextChangedI	autocmd.txt	/*TextChangedI*
 Transact-SQL	ft_sql.txt	/*Transact-SQL*
@@ -4800,9 +4846,11 @@ W18	syntax.txt	/*W18*
 W19	autocmd.txt	/*W19*
 W20	if_pyth.txt	/*W20*
 W21	if_pyth.txt	/*W21*
+W22	eval.txt	/*W22*
 WORD	motion.txt	/*WORD*
 WWW	intro.txt	/*WWW*
 Win32	os_win32.txt	/*Win32*
+WinBar	gui.txt	/*WinBar*
 WinEnter	autocmd.txt	/*WinEnter*
 WinLeave	autocmd.txt	/*WinLeave*
 WinNew	autocmd.txt	/*WinNew*
@@ -5396,6 +5444,7 @@ cinoptions-values	indent.txt	/*cinoptions-values*
 clear-undo	undo.txt	/*clear-undo*
 clearmatches()	eval.txt	/*clearmatches()*
 client-server	remote.txt	/*client-server*
+client-server-name	remote.txt	/*client-server-name*
 clientserver	remote.txt	/*clientserver*
 clipboard	gui.txt	/*clipboard*
 clipboard-autoselect	options.txt	/*clipboard-autoselect*
@@ -6113,6 +6162,7 @@ ft-mathematica-syntax	syntax.txt	/*ft-mathematica-syntax*
 ft-mma-syntax	syntax.txt	/*ft-mma-syntax*
 ft-moo-syntax	syntax.txt	/*ft-moo-syntax*
 ft-msql-syntax	syntax.txt	/*ft-msql-syntax*
+ft-n1ql-syntax	syntax.txt	/*ft-n1ql-syntax*
 ft-nasm-syntax	syntax.txt	/*ft-nasm-syntax*
 ft-ncf-syntax	syntax.txt	/*ft-ncf-syntax*
 ft-nroff-syntax	syntax.txt	/*ft-nroff-syntax*
@@ -6569,6 +6619,7 @@ gs	various.txt	/*gs*
 gsp.vim	syntax.txt	/*gsp.vim*
 gstar	pattern.txt	/*gstar*
 gt	tabpage.txt	/*gt*
+gtk-css	gui_x11.txt	/*gtk-css*
 gtk-tooltip-colors	gui_x11.txt	/*gtk-tooltip-colors*
 gu	change.txt	/*gu*
 gugu	change.txt	/*gugu*
@@ -6738,6 +6789,7 @@ hl-PmenuSbar	syntax.txt	/*hl-PmenuSbar*
 hl-PmenuSel	syntax.txt	/*hl-PmenuSel*
 hl-PmenuThumb	syntax.txt	/*hl-PmenuThumb*
 hl-Question	syntax.txt	/*hl-Question*
+hl-QuickFixLine	syntax.txt	/*hl-QuickFixLine*
 hl-Scrollbar	syntax.txt	/*hl-Scrollbar*
 hl-Search	syntax.txt	/*hl-Search*
 hl-SignColumn	syntax.txt	/*hl-SignColumn*
@@ -7240,6 +7292,7 @@ mapmode-n	map.txt	/*mapmode-n*
 mapmode-nvo	map.txt	/*mapmode-nvo*
 mapmode-o	map.txt	/*mapmode-o*
 mapmode-s	map.txt	/*mapmode-s*
+mapmode-t	map.txt	/*mapmode-t*
 mapmode-v	map.txt	/*mapmode-v*
 mapmode-x	map.txt	/*mapmode-x*
 mapping	map.txt	/*mapping*
@@ -7354,6 +7407,7 @@ mzscheme-vim	if_mzsch.txt	/*mzscheme-vim*
 mzscheme-vimext	if_mzsch.txt	/*mzscheme-vimext*
 mzscheme-window	if_mzsch.txt	/*mzscheme-window*
 n	pattern.txt	/*n*
+n1ql.vim	syntax.txt	/*n1ql.vim*
 nasm.vim	syntax.txt	/*nasm.vim*
 navigation	motion.txt	/*navigation*
 nb-commands	netbeans.txt	/*nb-commands*
@@ -7697,6 +7751,7 @@ no-type-checking	eval.txt	/*no-type-checking*
 no_buffers_menu	gui.txt	/*no_buffers_menu*
 no_mail_maps	filetype.txt	/*no_mail_maps*
 no_plugin_maps	filetype.txt	/*no_plugin_maps*
+nocombine	syntax.txt	/*nocombine*
 non-greedy	pattern.txt	/*non-greedy*
 non-zero-arg	eval.txt	/*non-zero-arg*
 none-variable	eval.txt	/*none-variable*
@@ -7973,6 +8028,7 @@ qnx-terminal	os_qnx.txt	/*qnx-terminal*
 quake.vim	syntax.txt	/*quake.vim*
 quickfix	quickfix.txt	/*quickfix*
 quickfix-6	version6.txt	/*quickfix-6*
+quickfix-ID	quickfix.txt	/*quickfix-ID*
 quickfix-directory-stack	quickfix.txt	/*quickfix-directory-stack*
 quickfix-error-lists	quickfix.txt	/*quickfix-error-lists*
 quickfix-functions	usr_41.txt	/*quickfix-functions*
@@ -8202,6 +8258,7 @@ servername-variable	eval.txt	/*servername-variable*
 session-file	starting.txt	/*session-file*
 set-option	options.txt	/*set-option*
 set-spc-auto	spell.txt	/*set-spc-auto*
+setbufline()	eval.txt	/*setbufline()*
 setbufvar()	eval.txt	/*setbufvar()*
 setcharsearch()	eval.txt	/*setcharsearch()*
 setcmdpos()	eval.txt	/*setcmdpos()*
@@ -8408,6 +8465,7 @@ star	pattern.txt	/*star*
 starstar	editing.txt	/*starstar*
 starstar-wildcard	editing.txt	/*starstar-wildcard*
 start-of-file	pattern.txt	/*start-of-file*
+start-vimdiff	diff.txt	/*start-vimdiff*
 starting	starting.txt	/*starting*
 starting-amiga	starting.txt	/*starting-amiga*
 starting.txt	starting.txt	/*starting.txt*
@@ -8428,6 +8486,7 @@ strdisplaywidth()	eval.txt	/*strdisplaywidth()*
 strftime()	eval.txt	/*strftime()*
 strgetchar()	eval.txt	/*strgetchar()*
 stridx()	eval.txt	/*stridx()*
+strikethrough	syntax.txt	/*strikethrough*
 string	eval.txt	/*string*
 string()	eval.txt	/*string()*
 string-functions	usr_41.txt	/*string-functions*
@@ -8514,11 +8573,14 @@ t_AL	term.txt	/*t_AL*
 t_BD	term.txt	/*t_BD*
 t_BE	term.txt	/*t_BE*
 t_CS	term.txt	/*t_CS*
+t_CTRL-W_CTRL-C	terminal.txt	/*t_CTRL-W_CTRL-C*
+t_CTRL-\_CTRL-N	terminal.txt	/*t_CTRL-\\_CTRL-N*
 t_CV	term.txt	/*t_CV*
 t_Ce	term.txt	/*t_Ce*
 t_Co	term.txt	/*t_Co*
 t_Cs	term.txt	/*t_Cs*
 t_DL	term.txt	/*t_DL*
+t_EC	term.txt	/*t_EC*
 t_EI	term.txt	/*t_EI*
 t_F1	term.txt	/*t_F1*
 t_F2	term.txt	/*t_F2*
@@ -8555,12 +8617,19 @@ t_KL	term.txt	/*t_KL*
 t_PE	term.txt	/*t_PE*
 t_PS	term.txt	/*t_PS*
 t_RB	term.txt	/*t_RB*
+t_RC	term.txt	/*t_RC*
 t_RI	term.txt	/*t_RI*
+t_RS	term.txt	/*t_RS*
 t_RV	term.txt	/*t_RV*
+t_SC	term.txt	/*t_SC*
+t_SH	term.txt	/*t_SH*
 t_SI	term.txt	/*t_SI*
 t_SR	term.txt	/*t_SR*
 t_Sb	term.txt	/*t_Sb*
 t_Sf	term.txt	/*t_Sf*
+t_Te	term.txt	/*t_Te*
+t_Ts	term.txt	/*t_Ts*
+t_VS	term.txt	/*t_VS*
 t_WP	term.txt	/*t_WP*
 t_WS	term.txt	/*t_WS*
 t_ZH	term.txt	/*t_ZH*
@@ -8773,9 +8842,27 @@ temp-file-name	eval.txt	/*temp-file-name*
 tempfile	change.txt	/*tempfile*
 template	autocmd.txt	/*template*
 tempname()	eval.txt	/*tempname()*
+term++close	terminal.txt	/*term++close*
+term++open	terminal.txt	/*term++open*
 term-dependent-settings	term.txt	/*term-dependent-settings*
 term-list	syntax.txt	/*term-list*
 term.txt	term.txt	/*term.txt*
+term_getaltscreen()	eval.txt	/*term_getaltscreen()*
+term_getattr()	eval.txt	/*term_getattr()*
+term_getcursor()	eval.txt	/*term_getcursor()*
+term_getjob()	eval.txt	/*term_getjob()*
+term_getline()	eval.txt	/*term_getline()*
+term_getscrolled()	eval.txt	/*term_getscrolled()*
+term_getsize()	eval.txt	/*term_getsize()*
+term_getstatus()	eval.txt	/*term_getstatus()*
+term_gettitle()	eval.txt	/*term_gettitle()*
+term_gettty()	eval.txt	/*term_gettty()*
+term_list()	eval.txt	/*term_list()*
+term_scrape()	eval.txt	/*term_scrape()*
+term_sendkeys()	eval.txt	/*term_sendkeys()*
+term_setsize()	eval.txt	/*term_setsize()*
+term_start()	eval.txt	/*term_start()*
+term_wait()	eval.txt	/*term_wait()*
 termcap	term.txt	/*termcap*
 termcap-changed	version4.txt	/*termcap-changed*
 termcap-colors	term.txt	/*termcap-colors*
@@ -8783,16 +8870,24 @@ termcap-cursor-color	term.txt	/*termcap-cursor-color*
 termcap-cursor-shape	term.txt	/*termcap-cursor-shape*
 termcap-options	term.txt	/*termcap-options*
 termcap-title	term.txt	/*termcap-title*
+terminal	terminal.txt	/*terminal*
 terminal-colors	os_unix.txt	/*terminal-colors*
+terminal-debug	terminal.txt	/*terminal-debug*
+terminal-functions	usr_41.txt	/*terminal-functions*
 terminal-info	term.txt	/*terminal-info*
 terminal-key-codes	term.txt	/*terminal-key-codes*
 terminal-options	term.txt	/*terminal-options*
 terminal-output-codes	term.txt	/*terminal-output-codes*
+terminal-testing	terminal.txt	/*terminal-testing*
+terminal-typing	terminal.txt	/*terminal-typing*
+terminal-use	terminal.txt	/*terminal-use*
+terminal.txt	terminal.txt	/*terminal.txt*
 terminfo	term.txt	/*terminfo*
 termresponse-variable	eval.txt	/*termresponse-variable*
 test-functions	usr_41.txt	/*test-functions*
 test_alloc_fail()	eval.txt	/*test_alloc_fail()*
 test_autochdir()	eval.txt	/*test_autochdir()*
+test_feedinput()	eval.txt	/*test_feedinput()*
 test_garbagecollect_now()	eval.txt	/*test_garbagecollect_now()*
 test_ignore_error()	eval.txt	/*test_ignore_error()*
 test_null_channel()	eval.txt	/*test_null_channel()*
@@ -9019,7 +9114,11 @@ v:t_list	eval.txt	/*v:t_list*
 v:t_none	eval.txt	/*v:t_none*
 v:t_number	eval.txt	/*v:t_number*
 v:t_string	eval.txt	/*v:t_string*
+v:termblinkresp	eval.txt	/*v:termblinkresp*
 v:termresponse	eval.txt	/*v:termresponse*
+v:termrgbresp	eval.txt	/*v:termrgbresp*
+v:termstyleresp	eval.txt	/*v:termstyleresp*
+v:termu7resp	eval.txt	/*v:termu7resp*
 v:testing	eval.txt	/*v:testing*
 v:this_session	eval.txt	/*v:this_session*
 v:throwpoint	eval.txt	/*v:throwpoint*
@@ -9339,6 +9438,7 @@ window-resize	windows.txt	/*window-resize*
 window-size	term.txt	/*window-size*
 window-size-functions	usr_41.txt	/*window-size-functions*
 window-tag	windows.txt	/*window-tag*
+window-toolbar	gui.txt	/*window-toolbar*
 window-variable	eval.txt	/*window-variable*
 windowid	windows.txt	/*windowid*
 windowid-variable	eval.txt	/*windowid-variable*

runtime/doc/term.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*term.txt*      For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2017 Apr 11
+*term.txt*      For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2017 Aug 28
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -295,13 +295,11 @@ OUTPUT CODES						*terminal-output-codes*
 	t_ts	set window title start (to status line)		*t_ts* *'t_ts'*
 	t_ue	underline end					*t_ue* *'t_ue'*
 	t_us	underline mode					*t_us* *'t_us'*
-	t_Ce	undercurl end					*t_Ce* *'t_Ce'*
-	t_Cs	undercurl mode					*t_Cs* *'t_Cs'*
 	t_ut	clearing uses the current background color	*t_ut* *'t_ut'*
 	t_vb	visual bell					*t_vb* *'t_vb'*
 	t_ve	cursor visible					*t_ve* *'t_ve'*
 	t_vi	cursor invisible				*t_vi* *'t_vi'*
-	t_vs	cursor very visible				*t_vs* *'t_vs'*
+	t_vs	cursor very visible (blink)			*t_vs* *'t_vs'*
 								*t_xs* *'t_xs'*
 	t_xs	if non-empty, standout not erased by overwriting (hpterm)
 								*t_xn* *'t_xn'*
@@ -311,11 +309,16 @@ OUTPUT CODES						*terminal-output-codes*
 	t_ZR	italics end					*t_ZR* *'t_ZR'*
 
 Added by Vim (there are no standard codes for these):
+	t_Ce	undercurl end					*t_Ce* *'t_Ce'*
+	t_Cs	undercurl mode					*t_Cs* *'t_Cs'*
+	t_Te	strikethrough end				*t_Te* *'t_Te'*
+	t_Ts	strikethrough mode				*t_Ts* *'t_Ts'*
 	t_IS	set icon text start				*t_IS* *'t_IS'*
 	t_IE	set icon text end				*t_IE* *'t_IE'*
 	t_WP	set window position (Y, X) in pixels		*t_WP* *'t_WP'*
 	t_GP	get window position (Y, X) in pixels		*t_GP* *'t_GP'*
-	t_WS	set window size (height, width) in characters	*t_WS* *'t_WS'*
+	t_WS	set window size (height, width in cells)	*t_WS* *'t_WS'*
+	t_VS	cursor normally visible (no blink)		*t_VS* *'t_VS'*
 	t_SI	start insert mode (bar cursor shape)		*t_SI* *'t_SI'*
 	t_SR	start replace mode (underline cursor shape)	*t_SR* *'t_SR'*
 	t_EI	end insert or replace mode (block cursor shape)	*t_EI* *'t_EI'*
@@ -333,6 +336,29 @@ Added by Vim (there are no standard codes for these):
 		|xterm-bracketed-paste|
 	t_BD	disable bracketed paste mode			*t_BD* *'t_BD'*
 		|xterm-bracketed-paste|
+	t_SC	set cursor color start				*t_SC* *'t_SC'*
+	t_EC	set cursor color end				*t_EC* *'t_EC'*
+	t_SH	set cursor shape				*t_SH* *'t_SH'*
+	t_RC	request terminal cursor blinking		*t_RC* *'t_RC'*
+	t_RS	request terminal cursor style			*t_RS* *'t_RS'*
+
+Some codes have a start, middle and end part.  The start and end are defined
+by the termcap option, the middle part is text.
+	set title text:     t_ts {title text} t_fs
+	set icon text:      t_IS {icon text} t_IE
+	set cursor color:   t_SC  {color name}  t_EC
+
+t_SH must take one argument:
+	0, 1 or none  	blinking block cursor
+	2	      	block cursor
+	3		blinking underline cursor
+	4		underline cursor
+	5		blinking vertical bar cursor
+	6		vertical bar cursor
+
+t_RS is sent only if the response to t_RV has been received.  It is not used
+on Mac OS when Terminal.app could be recognized from the termresponse.
+
 
 KEY CODES						*terminal-key-codes*
 Note: Use the <> form if possible

runtime/doc/terminal.txt

@@ -0,0 +1,502 @@
+*terminal.txt*	For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2017 Sep 26
+
+
+		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL	  by Bram Moolenaar
+
+
+Terminal window support					*terminal*
+
+
+WARNING: THIS IS ONLY PARTLY IMPLEMENTED, ANYTHING CAN STILL CHANGE
+
+The terminal feature is optional, use this to check if your Vim has it: >
+	echo has('terminal')
+If the result is "1" you have it.
+
+
+1. Basic use			|terminal-use|
+2. Remote testing		|terminal-testing|
+3. Debugging			|terminal-debug|
+
+{Vi does not have any of these commands}
+{only available when compiled with the |+terminal| feature}
+
+The terminal feature requires the |+multi_byte|, |+job| and |+channel| features.
+
+==============================================================================
+1. Basic use						*terminal-use*
+
+This feature is for running a terminal emulator in a Vim window.  A job can be
+started connected to the terminal emulator. For example, to run a shell: >
+     :term bash
+
+Or to run build command: >
+     :term make myprogram
+
+The job runs asynchronously from Vim, the window will be updated to show
+output from the job, also while editing in another window.
+
+
+Typing ~
+							*terminal-typing*
+When the keyboard focus is in the terminal window, typed keys will be sent to
+the job.  This uses a pty when possible.  You can click outside of the
+terminal window to move keyboard focus elsewhere.
+
+CTRL-W can be used to navigate between windows and other CTRL-W commands, e.g.:
+	CTRL-W CTRL-W 	move focus to the next window
+	CTRL-W :	enter an Ex command
+See |CTRL-W| for more commands.
+
+Special in the terminal window:			*CTRL-W_.*  *CTRL-W_N* 
+	CTRL-W .	send a CTRL-W to the job in the terminal
+	CTRL-W N	go to Terminal-Normal mode, see |Terminal-mode|
+	CTRL-\ CTRL-N   go to Terminal-Normal mode, see |Terminal-mode|
+	CTRL-W " {reg}  paste register {reg}		*CTRL-W_quote*
+			Also works with the = register to insert the result of
+			evaluating an expression.
+	CTRL-W CTRL-C	ends the job, see below |t_CTRL-W_CTRL-C|
+
+See option 'termkey' for specifying another key instead of CTRL-W that
+will work like CTRL-W.  However, typing 'termkey' twice sends 'termkey' to
+the job.  For example:
+	'termkey' CTRL-W    move focus to the next window
+	'termkey' :	    enter an Ex command
+	'termkey' 'termkey' send 'termkey' to the job in the terminal
+	'termkey' .	    send a CTRL-W to the job in the terminal
+	'termkey' N  	    go to terminal Normal mode, see below
+	'termkey' CTRL-N    same as CTRL-W N
+	'termkey' CTRL-C    same as |t_CTRL-W_CTRL-C|
+							*t_CTRL-\_CTRL-N*
+The special key combination CTRL-\ CTRL-N can be used to switch to Normal
+mode, just like this works in any other mode.
+							*t_CTRL-W_CTRL-C*
+CTRL-W CTRL-C can be typed to forcefully end the job.  On MS-Windows a
+CTRL-BREAK will also kill the job.
+
+If you type CTRL-C the effect depends on what the pty has been configured to
+do.  For simple commands this causes a SIGINT to be sent to the job, which
+would end it.  Other commands may ignore the SIGINT or handle the CTRL-C
+themselves (like Vim does).
+
+To change the keys you type use terminal mode mappings, see |:tmap|.
+These are defined like any mapping, but apply only when typing keys that are
+sent to the job running in the terminal.  For example, to make Escape switch
+to Terminal-Normal mode: >
+   tnoremap <Esc> <C-W>N
+
+After opening the terminal window and setting 'buftype' to "terminal" the
+BufWinEnter autocommand event is triggered.  This makes it possible to set
+options specifically for the window and buffer.  Example: >
+   au BufWinEnter * if &buftype == 'terminal' | setlocal bufhidden=hide | endif
+
+
+Size and color ~
+
+See option 'termsize' for controlling the size of the terminal window.
+(TODO: scrolling when the terminal is larger than the window)
+
+The job running in the terminal can change the colors.  The default foreground
+and background colors are taken from Vim, the Normal highlight group.
+
+For a color terminal the 'background' option is used to decide whether the
+terminal window will start with a white or black background.
+
+To use a different color the Terminal highlight group can be used: >
+    hi Terminal ctermbg=lightgrey ctermfg=blue guibg=lightgrey guifg=blue
+
+
+Syntax ~
+
+:[range]ter[minal] [options] [command]			*:ter* *:terminal*
+			Open a new terminal window.
+
+			If [command] is provided run it as a job and connect
+			the input and output to the terminal.
+			If [command] is not given the 'shell' option is used.
+			if [command] is NONE no job is started, the pty of the
+			terminal can be used by a command like gdb.
+
+			A new buffer will be created, using [command] or
+			'shell' as the name, prefixed with a "!".  If a buffer
+			by this name already exists a number is added in
+			parentheses.  E.g. if "gdb" exists the second terminal
+			buffer will use "!gdb (1)".
+
+			If [range] is given the specified lines are used as
+			input for the job.  It will not be possible to type
+			keys in the terminal window.  For MS-Windows see the
+			++eof argument below.
+
+			Two comma separated numbers are used as "rows,cols".
+			E.g. `:24,80gdb` opens a terminal with 24 rows and 80
+			columns.  However, if the terminal window spans the
+			Vim window with, there is no vertical split, the Vim
+			window width is used.
+						*term++close* *term++open*
+			Supported [options] are:
+			++close		The terminal window will close
+					automatically when the job terminates.
+			++open		When the job terminates and no window
+					shows it, a window will be opened.
+					Note that this can be interruptive.
+			++curwin	Open the terminal in the current
+					window, do not split the current
+					window.  Fails if the current buffer
+					cannot be |abandon|ed.
+			++hidden	Open the terminal in a hidden buffer,
+					no window will be used.
+			++rows={height} Use {height} for the terminal window
+					height.
+			++cols={width}  Use {width} for the terminal window
+					width.
+			++eof={text}	when using [range]: text to send after
+					the last line was written. Cannot
+					contain white space.  A CR is
+					appended.  For MS-Windows the default
+					is to send CTRL-D.
+					E.g. for a shell use "++eof=exit" and
+					for Python "++eof=exit()".  Special
+					codes can be used like with `:map`,
+					e.g. "<C-Z>" for CTRL-Z.
+
+			If you want to use more options use the |term_start()|
+			function.
+
+When the buffer associated with the terminal is unloaded or wiped out the job
+is killed, similar to calling `job_stop(job, "kill")`
+
+So long as the job is running the window behaves like it contains a modified
+buffer.  Trying to close the window with `CTRL-W :quit` fails.  When using
+`CTRL-W :quit!` the job is ended.  The text in the window is lost.  The buffer
+still exists, but getting it in a window with `:buffer` will show an empty
+buffer.
+
+Trying to close the window with `CTRL-W :close` also fails.   Using
+`CTRL-W :close!` will close the window and make the buffer hidden.
+
+You can use `CTRL-W :hide` to close the terminal window and make the buffer
+hidden, the job keeps running.  The `:buffer` command can be used to turn the
+current window into a terminal window.  If there are unsaved changes this
+fails, use !  to force, as usual.
+
+To have a background job run without a window, and open the window when it's
+done, use options like this: >
+	:term ++hidden ++open make
+Note that the window will open at an unexpected moment, this will interrupt
+what you are doing.
+
+							*E947* *E948*
+So long as the job is running, the buffer is considered modified and Vim
+cannot be quit easily, see |abandon|.
+
+When the job has finished and no changes were made to the buffer: closing the
+window will wipe out the buffer.
+
+Before changes can be made to a terminal buffer, the 'modifiable' option must
+be set.  This is only possible when the job has finished.  At the first change
+the buffer will become a normal buffer and the highlighting is removed.
+You may want to change the buffer name with |:file| to be able to write, since
+the buffer name will still be set to the command.
+
+
+Resizing ~
+
+The size of the terminal can be in one of three modes:
+
+1. The 'termsize' option is empty: The terminal size follows the window size.
+   The minimal size is 2 screen lines with 10 cells.
+
+2. The 'termsize' option is "rows*cols", where "rows" is the minimal number of
+   screen rows and "cols" is the minimal number of cells.
+
+3. The 'termsize' option is "rowsXcols" (where the x is upper or lower case).
+   The terminal size is fixed to the specified number of screen lines and
+   cells.  If the window is bigger there will be unused empty space.
+
+If the window is smaller than the terminal size, only part of the terminal can
+be seen (the lower-left part).
+
+The |term_getsize()| function can be used to get the current size of the
+terminal.  |term_setsize()| can be used only when in the first or second mode,
+not when 'termsize' is "rowsXcols".
+
+
+Terminal-Job and Terminal-Normal mode ~
+							*Terminal-mode*
+When the job is running the contents of the terminal is under control of the
+job.  That includes the cursor position.  Typed keys are sent to the job.
+The terminal contents can change at any time.  This is called Terminal-Job
+mode.
+
+Use CTRL-W N (or 'termkey' N) to switch to Terminal-Normal mode.  Now the
+contents of the terminal window is under control of Vim, the job output is
+suspended.  CTRL-\ CTRL-N does the same.
+
+Terminal-Job mode is where |:tmap| mappings are applied. Keys sent by
+|term_sendkeys()| are not subject to tmap, but keys from |feedkeys()| are.
+
+							*E946*
+In Terminal-Normal mode you can move the cursor around with the usual Vim
+commands, Visually mark text, yank text, etc.  But you cannot change the
+contents of the buffer.  The commands that would start insert mode, such as
+'i' and 'a', return to Terminal-Job mode.  The window will be updated to show
+the contents of the terminal. |:startinsert| is ineffective.
+
+In Terminal-Normal mode the statusline and window title show "(Terminal)".  If
+the job ends while in Terminal-Normal mode this changes to
+"(Terminal-finished)".
+
+It is not possible to enter Insert mode from Terminal-Job mode.
+
+
+Cursor style ~
+
+By default the cursor in the terminal window uses a not blinking block.  The
+normal xterm escape sequences can be used to change the blinking state and the
+shape.  Once focus leaves the terminal window Vim will restore the original
+cursor.
+
+An exception is when xterm is started with the "-bc" argument, or another way
+that causes the cursor to blink.  This actually means that the blinking flag
+is inverted.  Since Vim cannot detect this, the terminal window cursor
+blinking will also be inverted.
+
+
+Unix ~
+
+On Unix a pty is used to make it possible to run all kinds of commands.  You
+can even run Vim in the terminal!  That's used for debugging, see below.
+
+Environment variables are used to pass information to the running job:
+    TERM		name of the terminal, 'term'
+    ROWS		number of rows in the terminal initially
+    LINES		same as ROWS
+    COLUMNS		number of columns in the terminal initially
+    COLORS		number of colors, 't_Co' (256*256*256 in the GUI)
+    VIM_SERVERNAME	v:servername
+
+The |client-server| feature can be used to communicate with the Vim instance
+where the job was started.  This only works when v:servername is not empty.
+If needed you can set it with: >
+	call remote_startserver('vim-server')
+
+In the job you can then do something like: >
+	vim --servername $VIM_SERVERNAME --remote +123 some_file.c
+This will open the file "some_file.c" and put the cursor on line 123.
+
+
+MS-Windows ~
+
+On MS-Windows winpty is used to make it possible to run all kind of commands.
+Obviously, they must be commands that run in a terminal, not open their own
+window.
+
+You need the following two files from winpty:
+
+    winpty.dll
+    winpty-agent.exe
+
+You can download them from the following page:
+
+    https://github.com/rprichard/winpty
+
+Just put the files somewhere in your PATH.  You can set the 'winptydll' option
+to point to the right file, if needed.  If you have both the 32-bit and 64-bit
+version, rename to winpty32.dll and winpty64.dll to match the way Vim was
+build.
+
+==============================================================================
+2. Remote testing					*terminal-testing*
+
+Most Vim tests execute a script inside Vim.  For some tests this does not
+work, running the test interferes with the code being tested.  To avoid this
+Vim is executed in a terminal window.  The test sends keystrokes to it and
+inspects the resulting screen state.
+
+Functions ~
+
+term_sendkeys()		send keystrokes to a terminal (not subject to tmap)
+term_wait()		wait for screen to be updated
+term_scrape()		inspect terminal screen
+
+
+==============================================================================
+3. Debugging					*terminal-debug*
+
+The Terminal debugging plugin can be used to debug a program with gdb and view
+the source code in a Vim window.  Since this is completely contained inside
+Vim this also works remotely over an ssh connection.
+
+
+Starting ~
+
+Load the plugin with this command: >
+	packadd termdebug
+<							*:Termdebug*
+To start debugging use `:TermDebug` folowed by the command name, for example: >
+	:Termdebug vim
+
+This opens two windows:
+gdb window	A terminal window in which "gdb vim" is executed.  Here you
+		can directly interact with gdb.  The buffer name is "!gdb".
+program window	A terminal window for the executed program.  When "run" is
+		used in gdb the program I/O will happen in this window, so
+		that it does not interfere with controlling gdb.  The buffer
+		name is "gdb program".
+
+The current window is used to show the source code.  When gdb pauses the
+source file location will be displayed, if possible.  A sign is used to
+highlight the current position (using highlight group debugPC).	 
+
+If the buffer in the current window is modified, another window will be opened
+to display the current gdb position.
+
+Focus the terminal of the executed program to interact with it.  This works
+the same as any command running in a terminal window.
+
+When the debugger ends, typically by typing "quit" in the gdb window, the two
+opened windows are closed.
+
+
+Example session ~
+
+Start in the Vim "src" directory and build Vim: >
+	% make
+Start Vim: >
+	% ./vim
+Load the termdebug plugin and start debugging Vim: >
+	:packadd termdebug
+	:Termdebug vim
+You should now have three windows:
+    source  - where you started, has a window toolbar with buttons
+    gdb	    - you can type gdb commands here
+    program - the executed program will use this window
+You can use CTRL-W CTRL-W or the mouse to move focus between windows.
+Put focus on the gdb window and type: >
+	break ex_help
+	run
+Vim will start running in the program window. Put focus there and type: >
+	:help gui
+Gdb will run into the ex_help breakpoint.  The source window now shows the 
+ex_cmds.c file.  A ">>" marker will appear where the breakpoint was set.  The
+line where the debugger stopped is highlighted.  You can now step through the
+program.  Let's use the mouse: click on the "Next" button in the window
+toolbar.  You will see the highlighting move as the debugger executes a line
+of source code.
+
+Click "Next" a few times until the for loop is highlighted.  Put the cursor on
+the end of "eap->arg", then click "Eval" in the toolbar.  You will see this
+displayed:
+	"eap->arg": 0x555555e68855 "gui" ~
+This way you can inspect the value of local variables.  You can also focus the
+gdb window and use a "print" command, e.g.: >
+	print *eap
+
+Now go back to the source window and put the cursor on the first line after
+the for loop, then type: >
+	:Break
+You will see a ">>" marker appear, this indicates the new breakpoint.  Now
+click "Cont" in the toolbar and the code until the breakpoint will be
+executed.
+
+You can type more advanced commands in the gdb window.  For example, type: >
+	watch curbuf
+Now click "Cont" in the toolbar (or type "cont" in the gdb window). Execution
+will now continue until the value of "curbuf" changes, which is in do_ecmd().
+To remove this watchpoint again type in the gdb window: >
+	delete 3
+
+You can see the stack by typing in the gdb window: >
+	where
+Move through the stack frames, e.g. with: >
+	frame 3
+The source window will show the code, at the point where the call was made to
+a deeper level.
+
+
+Stepping through code ~
+
+Put focus on the gdb window to type commands there.  Some common ones are:
+- CTRL-C    interrupt the program
+- next      execute the current line and stop at the next line
+- step      execute the current line and stop at the next statement, entering
+	    functions
+- finish    execute until leaving the current function
+- where     show the stack
+- frame N   go to the Nth stack frame
+- continue  continue execution
+
+In the window showing the source code some commands can used to control gdb:
+ :Break     set a breakpoint at the current line; a sign will be displayed
+ :Delete    delete a breakpoint at the current line
+ :Step	    execute the gdb "step" command
+ :Over      execute the gdb "next" command (:Next is a Vim command)
+ :Finish    execute the gdb "finish" command
+ :Continue  execute the gdb "continue" command
+
+The plugin adds a window toolbar with these entries:
+  Step	    :Step
+  Next	    :Over
+  Finish    :Finish
+  Cont	    :Continue
+  Eval	    :Evaluate
+This way you can use the mouse to perform the most common commands.
+
+
+Inspecting variables ~
+
+ :Evaluate	    evaluate the expression under the cursor
+ K		    same
+ :Evaluate {expr}   evaluate {expr}
+ :'<,'>Evaluate	    evaluate the Visually selected text
+
+This is similar to using "print" in the gdb window.
+
+
+Other commands ~
+
+ :Gdb	       jump to the gdb window
+ :Program      jump to the window with the running program
+
+
+Communication ~
+
+There is another, hidden, buffer, which is used for Vim to communicate with
+gdb.  The buffer name is "gdb communication".  Do not delete this buffer, it
+will break the debugger.
+
+
+Customizing ~
+
+To change the name of the gdb command, set the "termdebugger" variable before
+invoking `:Termdebug`: >
+	let termdebugger = "mygdb"
+Only debuggers fully compatible with gdb will work.  Vim uses the GDB/MI
+interface.  This probably requires gdb version 7.12.
+
+The color of the signs can be adjusted with these highlight groups:
+- debugPC		the current position
+- debugBreakpoint	a breakpoint
+
+The defaults are, when 'background' is "light":
+  hi debugPC term=reverse ctermbg=lightblue guibg=lightblue
+  hi debugBreakpoint term=reverse ctermbg=red guibg=red
+
+When 'background' is "dark":
+  hi debugPC term=reverse ctermbg=darkblue guibg=darkblue
+  hi debugBreakpoint term=reverse ctermbg=red guibg=red
+
+To change the width of the Vim window when debugging starts, and use a
+vertical split: >
+  let g:termdebug_wide = 163
+This will set &columns to 163 when :Termdebug is used.  The value is restored
+when quitting the debugger.
+If g:termdebug_wide is set and &Columns is already  larger than
+g:termdebug_wide then a vertical split will be used without changing &columns.
+Set it to 1 to get a vertical split without every changing &columns (useful
+for when the terminal can't be resized by Vim).
+
+
+
+ vim:tw=78:ts=8:ft=help:norl:

runtime/doc/todo.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*todo.txt*      For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2017 Jun 05
+*todo.txt*      For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2017 Sep 27
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL	  by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -35,15 +35,47 @@ entered there will not be repeated below, unless there is extra information.
 							*known-bugs*
 -------------------- Known bugs and current work -----------------------
 
+MS-Windows build and installer improvements:
+- Switch to VC2015 for building. (Ken Takata, 2017 Sep 21)
+  Check resulting binary on XP.
+- Patch to install 32 and 64 bit Gvimext and related dll files. (Ken Takata,
+  2017 Sep 23, #2144)
+
+:term hangs in Athena and Motif. (Kazunobu Kuriyama, 2017 Sep 17)
+
+Universal solution to detect if t_RS is working, using cursor position.
+Koichi Iwamoto, #2126
+
+No maintainer for Vietnamese translations.
+No maintainer for Simplified Chinese translations.
+
+Terminal emulator window:
+- Lots of stuff to implement, see src/terminal.c
+- Improve debugger interface:
+  Include all debug features of Agide.
+    - Implement the right-click popup menu for the terminal. Can use the
+      completion popup menu code and mouse dragging.
+      Use it for "set breakpoint", "remove breakpoint", etc.
+    - make showballoon() work in a terminal.  Requires getting mouse-move
+      events.
+    - send 'balloonText' events for the cursor position (using CursorHold ?)
+      in terminal mode.
+  - get ideas from http://clewn.sf.net
+  - Look into the idevim plugin/script.
+- Improve testing:
+  Make a screenshot of a terminal, store in a file.
+  Display a stored screenshot, display diff with another one.
+  Make a test that puts Vim in a specific state, make a screenshot and compare
+  with the expected screenshot.  Set t_Co to 256.
+
 +channel:
-- When redrawing for the channel buffer, command line completion is cleared.
+- Add a separate timeout for opening a socket.  Currently it's fixed at 50
-  (Ramel Eshed, 2017 May 4)
+  msec, which is too small for a remote connection. (tverniquet, #2130)
 - Try out background make plugin: 
   https://github.com/AndrewVos/vim-make-background
 - Problem with stderr on Windows? (Vincent Rischmann, 2016 Aug 31, #1026)
-- Add 'cwd' argument to start_job(): directory to change to in the child.
+- Writing raw mode to a buffer should still handle NL characters as line
-    check for valid directory before forking.
+  breaks. (Dmitry Zotikov, 2017 Aug 16)
-  Part of patch for environment, Yasuhiro Matsumoto, #1160
 - When out_cb executes :sleep, the close_cb may be invoked. (Daniel Hahler,
   2016 Dec 11, #1320)
 - Implement |job-term| ?
@@ -58,11 +90,13 @@ entered there will not be repeated below, unless there is extra information.
   Feb 9)  How to do this on MS-Windows?
 - For connection to server, a "keep open" flag would be useful.  Retry
   connecting in the main loop with zero timeout.
-- job_start(): run job in a newly opened terminal.
+- job_start(): run job in a newly opened terminal (not a terminal window).
     With xterm could use -S{pty}.
     Although user could use "xterm -e 'cmd arg'".
 
 Regexp problems:
+- [:space:] only matches ASCII spaces.  Add [:white:] for all space-like
+  characters, esp. including 0xa0.  Use character class zero.
 - Since 7.4.704 the old regex engine fails to match [[:print:]] in 0xf6.
   (Manuel Ortega, 2016 Apr 24)
   Test fails on Mac.  Avoid using isalpha(), isalnum(), etc?  Depends on
@@ -101,82 +135,209 @@ Regexp problems:
   col and vcol when moving to another line.
 - this doesn't work: "syntax match ErrorMsg /.\%9l\%>20c\&\%<28c/".  Leaving
   out the \& works.  Seems any column check after \& fails.
-- The pattern "\1" with the old engine gives E65, with the new engine it
-  matches the empty string. (Dominique Pelle, 2015 Oct 2, Nov 24)
-  had_endbrace[] is set but not initialized or used.
 - Difference between two engines: ".*\zs\/\@>\/" on text "///"
   (Chris Paul, 2016 Nov 13)  New engine not greedy enough?
   Another one: echom matchstr(" sdfsfsf\n sfdsdfsdf",'[^\n]*')
   (2017 May 15, #1252)
 
+Include a few color schemes, based on popularity:
+http://www.vim.org/scripts/script_search_results.php?keywords=&script_type=color+scheme&order_by=rating&direction=descending&search=search
+http://vimawesome.com/?q=tag:color-scheme
+Use names that indicate their appearnce (Christian Brabandt, 2017 Aug 3)
+- monokai - Xia Crusoe (2017 Aug 4)
+- seoul256 - Christian Brabandt (2017 Aug 3)
+- gruvbox -  Christian Brabandt (2017 Aug 3)
+- janah - Marco Hinz (2017 Aug 4)
+- apprentice - Romain Lafourcade (2017 Aug 6)  remarks about help file #1964
+Suggested by Hiroki Kokubun:
+- [Iceberg](https://github.com/cocopon/iceberg.vim) (my one)
+- [hybrid](https://github.com/w0ng/vim-hybrid)
+Include solarized color scheme?
+
+When starting with --clean packages under "start" are not loaded.  Make this
+work:  :packadd START {name}  similar to :runtime START name
+
+When using :packadd files under "later" are not used, which is inconsistent
+with packages under "start". (xtal8, #1994)
+
+After 8.0.0962 pasting leaves the cursor in another position. (Ken Takata,
+2017 Aug 23, #2015) Also (zdm, 2017 Aug 23)
+
+Patch to fix popup menu drawing when changing the window size. (Ozaki Kiichi,
+2017 Sep 17, #2110)
+
+Patch to fix cursor highlighting with match. (Ozaki Kiichi, 2017 Sep 17,
+#2111)
+
+Patch for not profiling the first line of a script. (Lemonboy, 2017 Sep 17,
+#2103)
+
+Mac Terminal.app: ctermbg=15 gives light grey instead of white.
+ctermbg=256 breaks clearing till end of the line.  Both work fine in xterm.
+
+Patch to avoid `rb_load_protect` as a workaround not to crash (#2147)
+
+Patch for drag&drop reordering of GUI tab pages reordering.
+(Ken Takata, 2013 Nov 22, second one, also by Masamichi Abe)
+Now on Git: https://gist.github.com/nocd5/165286495c782b815b94
+Update 2016 Aug 10.
+
+Using ":hi" causes a redraw, but a redraw may update the status line, which
+may trigger a ":hi" command.
+
+Last line not in profile if it is a continuation line. (LemonBoy, 2017 Sep 17,
+#2112)
+
 With foldmethod=syntax and nofoldenable comment highlighting isn't removed.
 (Marcin Szewczyk, 2017 Apr 26)
 
+Patch to make Mac features more clear and add "macdarwin". (Kazunobu Kuriyama,
+2017 Sep 5)
+
+Using 'wildignore' also applies to literally entered file name.  Also with
+:drop (remote commands).
+
 ml_get error when using a Python. (Yggdroot, 2017 Jun 1, #1737)
+Lemonboy can reproduce (2017 Jun 5)
 
 ml_get errors with buggy script. (Dominique, 2017 Apr 30)
 
 Error in emsg with buggy script. (Dominique, 2017 Apr 30)
 
+Patch to make ":set scroll&" work properly. (Ozaki Kiichi, 2017 Sep 17, #2104)
+
+mswin.vim should not map CTRL-F in the console (#2093)
+Patch from Christian, 2017 Sep 15.
+Installer patch from Ken Takata, link on #2093.
+
+Default install on MS-Windows should source defaults.vim.
+Ask whether to use Windows or Vim key behavior?
+
+matchit hasn't been maintained for a long time.  #955.
+
+Test runtime files.
+Start with filetype detection: testdir/test_filetype.vim
+
+Window not closed when deleting buffer. (Harm te Hennepe, 2017 Aug 27, #2029)
+
 Add options_default() / options_restore() to set several options to Vim
 defaults for a plugin. Comments from Zyx, 2017 May 10.
 Perhaps use a vimcontext / endvimcontext command block.
 
-Using freed memory with "qf" FileType autocommand that does :cclose.
+After using :noautocmd CursorMoved may still trigger. (Andy Stewart, 2017 Sep
-(Lemonboy, 2017 May 28, #1730, fix in 1734, with test that doesn't fail, but
+13, #2084).  Set old position after the command.
-it fails when run manually)  Add "starting" to test_override()?
+
+Illegal memory access, requires ASAN to see. (Dominique Pelle, 2015 Jul 28)
+Still happens (2017 Jul 9)
+
+When bracketed paste is used, pasting at the ":append" prompt does not get the
+line breaks. (Ken Takata, 2017 Aug 22)
+
+This example in the help does not work (Andy Wokula, 2017 Aug 20):
+    augroup mine | au! BufRead | augroup END
+
+Memory leaks in test_channel? (or is it because of fork())
+Memory leak in test_arabic.
+Using uninitialized value in test_crypt.
+
+Patch to make gM move to middle of line. (Yasuhiro Matsumoto, Sep 8, #2070)
+
+Include Haiku port. (Adrien Destugues, Siarzhuk Zharski, 2013 Oct 24)
+It can replace the BeOS code, which is likely not used anymore.
+Now on github: #1856.
+Got permission to include this under the Vim license.
+
+Refactored HTML indent file. (Michael Lee, #1821)
+
+Test_writefile_fails_conversion failure on Solaris because if different iconv
+behavior.  Skip when "uname" returns "SunOS"? (Pavel Heimlich, #1872)
+
+All functions are global, which makes functions like get() and len() awkward.
+For the future use the ~get() and ~len() syntax, e.g.:
+    mylist~get(idx)
+    mydict~get(idx)
+    mystring~len()
+Alternatives for ~:
+    ^  list^get()    could also be used
+    .  list.get()    already means concatenate
+    $  list$get()    harder to read
+    @  list@get()    harder to read
+    ->  list->get()  two characters, used for lambda
+
+The ++ options for the :edit command are also useful on the Vim command line.
+
+Overlong utf-8 sequence is displayed wrong. (Harm te Hennepe, 2017 Sep 14,
+#2089)  Patch with possible solution by Björn Linse.
+
+X11: Putting more than about 262040 characters of text on the clipboard and
+pasting it in another Vim doesn't work.  (Dominique Pelle, 2008 Aug 21-23)
+clip_x11_request_selection_cb() is called with zero value and length.
+Also: Get an error message from free() in the process that owns the selection.
+Seems to happen when the selection is requested the second time, but before
+clip_x11_convert_selection_cb() is invoked, thus in X library code.
+Kazunobu Kuriyama is working on a proper fix. (2017 Jul 25)
 
 Problem with three-piece comment. (Michael Lee, 2017 May 11, #1696)
 
+Creating a partial with an autoload function is confused about the "self"
+attribute of the function.  For an unknown function assume "self" and make
+that optiona? (Bjorn Linse, 2017 Aug 5)
+
+Cindent: returning a structure has more indent for the second item.
+(Sam Pagenkopf, 2017 Sep 14, #2090)
+
+Completion mixes results from the current buffer with tags and other files.
+Happens when typing CTRL-N while still search for results.  E.g., type "b_" in
+terminal.c and then CTRL-N twice.
+Should do current file first and not split it up when more results are found.
+(Also #1890)
+
+Python: After "import vim" error messages only show the first line of the
+stack trace. (Yggdroot, 2017 Jul 28, #1887)
+
 When checking if a bufref is valid, also check the buffer number, to catch the
 case of :bwipe followed by :new.
 
-Files for Latvian language. (Vitolins, 2017 May 3, #1675)
+Patch to skip writing a temp file for diffing if the buffer is equal to the
+existing file. (Akria Sheng, 2017 Jul 22)
+Could also skip writing lines that are the same.
+
+Patch with Files for Latvian language. (Vitolins, 2017 May 3, #1675)
+
+MS-Windows: Opening same file in a second gvim hangs. (Sven Bruggemann, 2017
+Jul 4)
 
 Setting 'clipboard' to "unnamed" makes a global command very slow (Daniel
 Drucker, 2017 May 8).
 This was supposed to be fixed, did it break again somehow?
 Christian cannot reproduce it.
 
+Using composing char in mapping does not work properly. maparg() shows the
+wrong thing. (Nikolai Pavlov, 2017 Jul 8, #1827)
+Or is this not an actual problem?
+
 Better TeX indent file. (Christian Brabandt, 2017 May 3)
 
 Openhab syntax file (mueller, #1678)
 
-Use gvimext.dll from the nightly build? (Issue #249)
+Patch to use a separate code for BS on Windows. (Linwei, #1823)
 
-Patch to remove HAVE_GTK_MULTIHEAD-relevant code. (Kazunobu Kuriyama, 2017 May
+Use gvimext.dll from the nightly build? (Issue #249)
-5) Update May 11
 
 'synmaxcol' works with bytes instead of screen cells. (Llandon, 2017 May 31,
 #1736)
 
-Patch to pass quickfix list index to functions. (Yegappan Lakshmanan, 2017 May
-31)
-
 Problem with using :cd when remotely editing a file. (Gerd Wachsmuth, 2017 May
 8, #1690)
 
-'equalalways' only works for one column. (Glacambre, 2017 May 15, #1707)
-
-Include solarized color scheme?
-
-Updates to GTK help. (Kazunobu Kuriyama, 2017 May 4)
-
 Running test_gui and test_gui_init with Motif sometimes kills the window
 manager.  Problem with Motif?
 
 Bogus characters inserted when triggering indent while changing text.
 (Vitor Antunes, 2016 Nov 22, #1269)
 
-Patch to have ":stag" respect 'switchbuf'. (Ingo Karkat, 2017 May 5, #1681)
+Using "wviminfo /tmp/viminfo" does not store file marks that Vim knows about,
-
+it only works when merging with an existing file.  (Shougo, 2017 Jun 19, #1781)
-Patch to improve building with MSVC. (Leonardo Manera, #1747)
-
-Wrong selection of quoted text (Guraga, #1687)
-Patch to fix selection of quoted text. (Christian Brabandt, 2017 May 7, #1687)
-
-Patch to use separate error message for regex range. (Itchyny, Ken Hamada,
-2017 May 16)
 
 Segmentation fault with complete(). (Lifepillar, 2017 Apr 29, #1668)
 Check for "pat" to be NULL in search_for_exact_line()?
@@ -185,17 +346,13 @@ How did it get NULL?  Comment by Christian, Apr 30.
 Is it possible to keep the complete menu open when calling complete()?
 (Prabir Shrestha, 2017 May 19, #1713)
 
-Calling may_req_ambiguous_char_width() and may_req_bg_color() only after
-executing command line commands may not work properly.
-(Rastislav Barlink, 2017 May 18)
-Set "starting" to 0 earlier, and move the may_req calls above exe_commands()?
-No, that's a problem with using "-c quit", not running Vim interactive.
-
 Memory leak in test97?  The string is actually freed.  Weird.
 
-Patch for shellescape(). (Christian Brabandt, 2017 Apr 20, #1590)
+Patch to add configure flags to skip rtl, farsi and arabic support.
+(Diego Carrión, #1867)
 
-Patch for flickering redraw. (Hirohito Higashi, 2017 Apr 23, #1637)
+assert_fails() can only check for the first error.  Make it possible to have
+it catch multiple errors and check all of them.
 
 New value "uselast" for 'switchbuf'. (Lemonboy, 2017 Apr 23, #1652)
 
@@ -210,19 +367,7 @@ Still need maplist() to find the mappings.  What can we use to identify a
 mapping?  Something unique would be better than the LHS.
 Perhaps simpler: actually delete the mappings.  Use maplist() to list matching
 mappings (with a lhs prefix, like maparg()), mapdelete() to delete,
-maprestore() to restore (using the output of maplist().
+maprestore() to restore (using the output of maplist()).
-
-Patch to support chinese wordcount in utf-8. (Rain, 2017 May 24, #1722)
-Or not?
-
-"gn" selects one character instead of the searched text. (keyboardfire, #1683)
-Patch by Christian, 2017 May 7.
-
-Wrong memory access using p_fdm, found in patch to add tests for diff mode
-(#1658) (Dominique Pelle, 2017 May 6)
-
-Patch to improve test coverage for diff mode. (Dominique Pelle, 2017 May 11,
-#1685)
 
 Add an argument to :mkvimrc (or add aother command) to skip mappings from
 plugins (source is a Vim script).  No need to put these in a .vimrc, they will
@@ -237,6 +382,9 @@ What if there is an invalid character?
 
 Json string with trailing \u should be an error. (Lcd)
 
+import can't be used in define option when include matches too.
+(Romain Lafourcade, 2017 Jun 18, #1519)
+
 When session file has name in argument list but the buffer was deleted, the
 buffer is not deleted when using the session file. (#1393)
 Should add the buffer in hidden state.
@@ -248,9 +396,6 @@ Wrong diff highlighting with three files. (2016 Oct 20, #1186)
 Also get E749 on exit.
 Another example in #1309
 
-Patch to change all use of &sw to shiftwidth(). (Tyru, 2017 Feb 19)
-Wait until maintainers integrate it.
-
 When deleting a mark or register, leave a tombstone, so that it's also deleted
 when writing viminfo (and the delete was the most recent action). #1339
 
@@ -280,6 +425,12 @@ highlighting for both stl and stlnc.  Patch by Ken Hamada (itchyny, 2016 Dec 11)
 Using CTRL-G_U in InsertCharPre causes trouble for redo. (Israel Chauca
 Fuentes, 2017 Feb 12, #1470)
 
+Add a "keytrans()" function, which turns the internal byte representation of a
+key into a form that can be used for :map.  E.g.
+    let xx = "\<C-Home>"
+    echo keytrans(xx)
+    <C-Home>
+
 Check for errors E704 and E705 only does VAR_FUNC, should also do VAR_PARTIAL.
 (Nikolai Pavlov, 2017 Mar 13, #1557)
 Make a function to check for function-like type?
@@ -293,12 +444,6 @@ Implement optional arguments for functions.
     call Foo(12, all = 0)
     call Foo(12, 15, 0)
 
-writefile() does not abort as soon as an error is found. (Nikolai Pavlov,
-2017 Feb 14, #1476)
-
-Patch to support on-the-spot and over-the-spot input method. (Ken Takata, 2017
-Feb 14).
-
 Change the Farsi code to work with UTF-8.  Possibly combined with the Arabic
 support, or similar.
 Invalid read error in Farsi mode. (Dominique Pelle, 2009 Aug 2)
@@ -309,11 +454,13 @@ somewhere else.  :{range}copy {dest} !cmd
 Patch to fix that empty first tab is not in session.
 (Hirohito Higashi, 2016 Nov 25, #1282)
 
-Patch for restoring wide characters in the console buffer.
+Patch to add random number generator. (Hong Xu, 2010 Nov 8, update Nov 10)
-(Ken Takata, 2016 Jun 7)
+Alternative from Christian Brabandt. (2010 Sep 19)
+New one from Yasuhiro Matsumoto, #1277.
 
 Patch to fix escaping of job arguments. (Yasuhiro Matsumoto, 2016 Oct 5)
 Update Oct 14: https://gist.github.com/mattn/d47e7d3bfe5ade4be86062b565a4bfca
+Update Aug 2017: #1954
 
 Characters deleted on completion. (Adrià Farrés, 2017 Apr 20, #1645)
 Remarks from Christian Brabandt (Apr 21)
@@ -322,9 +469,6 @@ The TermResponse event is not triggered when a plugin has set 'eventignore' to
 "all".  Netrw does this. (Gary Johnson, 2017 Jan 24)
 Postpone the event until 'eventignore' is reset.
 
-Patch to make urxvt mouse work better, recognize Esc[*M termcap code.
-(Maurice Bos, 2017 Feb 17, #1486)
-
 Expanding /**/ is slow.  Idea by Luc Hermitte, 2017 Apr 14.
 
 Once .exe with updated installer is available: Add remark to download page
@@ -339,7 +483,7 @@ MS-Windows.  Perhaps in \#  the \ is seen as a path separator. (Axel Bender,
 2017 Feb 9)  Can we expand wildcards first and send the path literally to the
 receiving Vim?  Or make an exception for #, it's not useful remotely.
 
-":sbr" docs state it respect 'switchbuf', but "vsplit" does not cause a
+":sbr" docs state it respects 'switchbuf', but "vsplit" does not cause a
 vertical split. (Haldean Brown, 2017 Mar 1)
 
 Use ADDR_OTHER instead of ADDR_LINES for many more commands.
@@ -358,11 +502,26 @@ Patch for wrong cursor position on wrapped line, involving breakindent.
 (Ozaki Kiichi, 2016 Nov 25)
 Does this also fix #1408 ?
 
+Patch to add "module" to quickfix entries. (Coot, 2017 Jun 8, #1757)
+
+'cursorline' and match interfere. (Ozaki Kiichi, 2017 Jun 23, #1792)
+
 Patch for 'cursorlinenr' option. (Ozaki Kiichi, 2016 Nov 30)
 
+Patch to be able to separately map CTRL-H and BS on Windows.
+(Linwei, 2017 Jul 11, #1833)
+
 When 'completeopt' has "noselect" does not insert a newline. (Lifepillar, 2017
 Apr 23, #1653)
 
+Using an external diff is inefficient.  Not all systems have a good diff
+program available (esp. MS-Windows).  Would be nice to have in internal diff
+implementation.  Can then also use this for displaying changes within a line.
+Olaf Dabrunz is working on this. (10 Jan 2016)
+9   Instead invoking an external diff program, use builtin code.  One can be
+    found here: http://www.ioplex.com/~miallen/libmba/dl/src/diff.c
+    It's complicated and badly documented.
+
 Window resizing with 'winfixheight': With a vertical split the height changes
 anyway. (Tommy allen, 2017 Feb 21, #1502)
 
@@ -419,9 +578,6 @@ Include the test.
 Patch to add tagfunc().  Cleaned up by Christian Brabandt, 2013 Jun 22.
 New update 2017 Apr 10, #1628
 
-Unnamed register only contains the last deleted text when appending deleted
-text to a register. (Wolfgang Jeltsch, reproduced by Ben Fritz, 2017 Apr 10)
-
 When 'keywordprg' starts with ":" the argument is still escaped as a shell
 command argument. (Romain Lafourcade, 2016 Oct 16, #1175)
 
@@ -439,6 +595,8 @@ execute() cannot be used with command completeion. (Daniel Hahler, 2016 Oct 1,
 
 cmap using execute() has side effects. (Killthemule, 2016 Aug 17, #983)
 
+:map X may print invalid data. (Nikolay Pavlov, 2017 Jul 3, #1816)
+
 Patch to order results from taglist(). (Duncan McDougall, 2016 Oct 25)
 
 patch for 'spellcamelcase' option: spellcheck each CamelCased word.
@@ -500,20 +658,12 @@ This does not work: :set cscopequickfix=a-
 
 Possibly wrong value for seq_cur. (Florent Fayolle, 2016 May 15, #806)
 
-Patch to add separate highlighting for quickfix current line.
-(anishsane, 2016 Sep 16, #1080)
-
 Filetype plugin for awk. (Doug Kearns, 2016 Sep 5)
 
 Patch to improve map documentation. Issue #799.
 
 Patch for syntax folding optimization. (Shougo, 2016 Sep 6, #1045)
 
-Patch for drag&drop reordering of GUI tab pages reordering.
-(Ken Takata, 2013 Nov 22, second one, also by Masamichi Abe)
-Now on Git: https://gist.github.com/nocd5/165286495c782b815b94
-Update 2016 Aug 10.
-
 We can use '. to go to the last change in the current buffer, but how about
 the last change in any buffer?  Can we use ', (, is next to .)?
 
@@ -528,11 +678,6 @@ Reject the value? #710.
 Patch to fix increment/decrement not working properly when 'virtualedit' is
 set. (Hirohito Higashi, 2016 Aug 1, #923)
 
-Patch to support strikethrough next to bold and italic. (Christian Brabandt,
-2013 Jul 30)  Update from Ken Takata, 2013 Oct 12.
-Update mentioned by Christian, 2016 Apr 25.
-Update from Ken Takata, 2016 Jul 17.
-
 When doing "vi buf.md" a BufNew autocommand for *.md is not triggered.
 Because of using the initial buffer? (Dun Peal, 2016 May 12)
 
@@ -556,11 +701,6 @@ Possibly include the needed code so that it can be build everywhere.
 Add a way to restart a timer.  It's similar to timer_stop() and timer_start(),
 but the reference remains valid.
 
-Patch to add setbufline(). (email from Yasuhiro Matsumoto, patch by Ozaki
-Kiichi, 2016 Feb 28)
-Update Mar 8: https://gist.github.com/mattn/23c1f50999084992ca98
-Update Mar 13: https://gist.github.com/mattn/23c1f50999084992ca98
-
 Need to try out instructions in INSSTALLpc.txt about how to install all
 interfaces and how to build Vim with them.
 Appveyor build with self-installing executable, includes getting most
@@ -673,8 +813,6 @@ Patch to add TagNotFound autocommand. (Anton Lindqvist, 2016 Feb 3)
 Patch to add Error autocommand. (Anton Lindqvist, 2016 Feb 17)
 Only remembers one error.
 
-Illegal memory access, requires ASAN to see. (Dominique Pelle, 2015 Jul 28)
-
 Gvim: when both Tab and CTRL-I are mapped, use CTRL-I not for Tab.
 
 Unexpected delay when using CTRL-O u.  It's not timeoutlen.
@@ -742,11 +880,6 @@ Patch to use two highlight groups for relative numbers. (Shaun Brady, 2016 Jan
 MS-Windows: Crash opening very long file name starting with "\\".
 (Christian Brock, 2012 Jun 29)
 
-Using an external diff is inefficient.  Not all systems have a good diff
-program available (esp. MS-Windows).  Would be nice to have in internal diff
-implementation.  Can then also use this for displaying changes within a line.
-Olaf Dabrunz is working on this.
-
 The OptionSet autocommand event is not always triggered. (Rick Howe, 2015 Sep
 24): :diffthis, :diffoff.
 
@@ -1020,9 +1153,6 @@ For the path use a hash instead of dir%dir%dir%name  hash%name.
 Patch to add ":undorecover", get as much text out of the undo file as
 possible. (Christian Brabandt, 2014 Mar 12, update Aug 22)
 
-Include Haiku port? (Adrien Destugues, Siarzhuk Zharski, 2013 Oct 24)
-It can replace the BeOS code, which is likely not used anymore.
-
 Updated spec ftplugin. (Matěj Cepl, 2013 Oct 16)
 
 Patch to right-align signs. (James Kolb (email james), 2013 Sep 23)
@@ -1032,8 +1162,6 @@ Patch to handle integer overflow. (Aaron Burrow, 2013 Dec 12)
 Patch to add "ntab" item in 'listchars' to repeat first character. (Nathaniel
 Braun, pragm, 2013 Oct 13)  A better solution 2014 Mar 5.
 
-/[b-a] gives error E16, should probably be E769.
-
 7   Windows XP: When using "ClearType" for text smoothing, a column of yellow
     pixels remains when typing spaces in front of a "D" ('guifont' set to
     "lucida_console:h8").
@@ -1317,9 +1445,6 @@ Windows keys not set properly on Windows 7?  (cncyber, 2010 Aug 26)
 When using a Vim server, a # in the path causes an error message.
 (Jeff Lanzarotta, 2011 Feb 17)
 
-Setting $HOME on MS-Windows is not very well documented.  Suggestion by Ben
-Fritz (2011 Oct 27).
-
 When there is a ">" in a line that "gq" wraps to the start of the next line,
 then the following line will pick it up as a leader.  Should get the leader
 from the first line, not a wrapped line. (Matt Ackeret, 2012 Feb 27)
@@ -1424,6 +1549,9 @@ GTK: tear-off menu does not work. (Kurt Sonnenmoser, 2010 Oct 25)
 Win32: tear-off menu does not work when menu language is German. (Markus
 Bossler, 2011 Mar 2)  Fixed by 7.3.095?
 
+Wish for NetBeans commands:
+    - make it possible to have 'defineAnnoType' also handle terminal colors.
+
 Version of netbeans.c for use with MacVim. (Kazuki Sakamoto, 2010 Nov 18)
 
 7.3.014 changed how backslash at end of line works, but still get a NUL when
@@ -1444,9 +1572,6 @@ New esperanto spell file can't be processed. (Dominique Pelle, 2011 Jan 30)
 Editing a file with a ^M with 'ff' set to "mac", opening a help file, then the
 ^M is displayed as ^J sometimes.  Getting 'ff' value from wrong window/buffer?
 
-'colorcolumn' has higher priority than hlsearch.  Should probably be the other
-way around. (Nazri Ramliy, 2013 Feb 19)
-
 When Vim is put in the background (SIGTSTP) and then gets a SIGHUP it doesn't
 exit.  It exists as soon as back in the foreground. (Stephen Liang, 2011 Jan
 9)  Caused by vim_handle_signal(SIGNAL_BLOCK); in ui.c.
@@ -1495,14 +1620,13 @@ setpos() does not restore cursor position after :normal. (Tyru, 2010 Aug 11)
 7   The 'directory' option supports changing path separators to "%" to make
     file names unique, also support this for 'backupdir'. (Mikolaj Machowski)
     Patch by Christian Brabandt, 2010 Oct 21.
+    Is this an update:  related to: #179
+    https://github.com/chrisbra/vim-mq-patches/blob/master/backupdir
+    Fixed patch 2017 Jul 1.
 
 With "tw=55 fo+=a" typing space before ) doesn't work well. (Scott Mcdermott,
 2010 Oct 24)
 
-Patch to add random number generator. (Hong Xu, 2010 Nov 8, update Nov 10)
-Alternative from Christian Brabandt. (2010 Sep 19)
-New one from Yasuhiro Matsumoto, #1277.
-
 Messages in message.txt are highlighted as examples.
 
 When using cp850 the NBSP (0xff) is not drawn correctly. (Brett Stahlman, 2010
@@ -2111,9 +2235,6 @@ with "gvim -nb:localhost:55555:foo".  From nc do: '1:editFile!0 "foo"'.  Then
 go to Insert mode and add a few lines.  Then backspacing every other time
 moves the cursor instead of deleting. (Chris Kaiser, 2007 Sep 25)
 
-Windows installer should install 32-bit version of right-click handler also on
-64-bit systems. (Brian Cunningham, 2011 Dec 28)
-
 Windows installer could add a "open in new tab of existing Vim" menu entry.
 Gvimext: patch to add "Edit with single Vim &tabbed" menu entry.
 Just have two choices, always using one Vim and selecting between using an
@@ -2442,13 +2563,6 @@ respond to selection requests.  Invoking XtDisownSelection() before executing
 the shell doesn't help.  Would require forking and doing a message loop, like
 what happens for the GUI.
 
-X11: Putting more than about 262040 characters of text on the clipboard and
-pasting it in another Vim doesn't work.  (Dominique Pelle, 2008 Aug 21-23)
-clip_x11_request_selection_cb() is called with zero value and length.
-Also: Get an error message from free() in the process that owns the selection.
-Seems to happen when the selection is requested the second time, but before
-clip_x11_convert_selection_cb() is invoked, thus in X library code.
-
 ":vimgrep" does not recognize a recursive symlink.  Is it possible to detect
 this, at least for Unix (using device/inode)?
 
@@ -3311,18 +3425,6 @@ Most interesting new features to be added when all bugs have been fixed:
     Alternative: Make a function for Ex commands: cmd_edit().
 -   Add COLUMN NUMBERS to ":" commands ":line1,line2[col1,col2]cmd".  Block
     can be selected with CTRL-V.  Allow '$' (end of line) for col2.
--   Add DEBUGGER INTERFACE.  Implementation for gdb by Xavier de Gaye.
-    Should work like an IDE.  Try to keep it generic.  Now found here:
-    http://clewn.sf.net.
-    And the idevim plugin/script.
-    To be able to start the debugger from inside Vim: For GUI run a program
-    with a netbeans connection; for console: start a program that splits the
-    terminal, runs the debugger in one window and reconnect Vim I/O to the
-    other window.
-    Wishes for NetBeans commands:
-    - make it possible to have 'defineAnnoType' also handle terminal colors.
-    - send 'balloonText' events for the cursor position (using CursorHold ?)
-      in terminal mode.
 -   ECLIPSE plugin.  Problem is: the interface is very complicated.  Need to
     implement part in Java and then connect to Vim.  Some hints from Alexandru
     Roman, 2004 Dec 15.  Should then also work with Oracle Jdeveloper, see JSR
@@ -3335,9 +3437,6 @@ Most interesting new features to be added when all bugs have been fixed:
     scrolls back to where the cursor is.
 -   Scroll commands by screen line. g CTRL-E and g CTRL-Y ?  Requires the
     first line to be able to start halfway.
--   Running a shell command from the GUI still has limitations.  Look into how
-    the terminal emulator of the Vim shell project can help:
-    http://vimshell.wana.at
 8   Add a command to jump to a certain kind of tag.  Allow the user to specify
     values for the optional fields.  E.g., ":tag size type=m".
     Also allow specifying the file and command, so that the result of
@@ -3526,9 +3625,6 @@ Spell checking:
 Diff mode:
 9   When making small changes, e.g. deleting a character, update the diff.
     Possibly without running diff.
-9   Instead invoking an external diff program, use builtin code.  One can be
-    found here: http://www.ioplex.com/~miallen/libmba/dl/src/diff.c
-    It's quite big and badly documented though.
 8   Also show difference with the file when editing started?  Should show what
     can be undone. (Tom Popovich)
 
@@ -3643,7 +3739,7 @@ Multi-byte characters:
     at a multi-byte character >= 0x100.
 -   Add the possibility to enter mappings which are used whenever normal text
     could be entered.  E.g., for "f" command.  But not in Normal mode.  Sort
-    of opposite of 'langmap'.  Use ":tmap" command?
+    of opposite of 'langmap'.  Use ":amap" command?
 -   When breaking a line, take properties of multi-byte characters into
     account.  The "linebreak" program from Bruno Haible can do it:
     ftp://ftp.ilog.fr/pub/Users/haible/gnu/linebreak-0.1.tar.gz
@@ -5615,11 +5711,11 @@ Various improvements:
 -   Support %name% expansion for "gf" on Windows.
 -   Make "gf" work on "file://c:/path/name".  "file:/c:/" and "file:///c:/"
     should also work?
--   Add 'urlpath', used like 'path' for when "gf" used on an URL?
+-   Add 'urlpath', used like 'path' for when "gf" used on a URL?
 8   When using "gf" on an absolute file name, while editing a remote file
     (starts with scp:// or http://) should prepend the method and machine
     name.
--   When finding an URL or file name, and it doesn't exist, try removing a
+-   When finding a URL or file name, and it doesn't exist, try removing a
     trailing '.'.
 -   Add ":path" command modifier.  Should work for every command that takes a
     file name argument, to search for the file name in 'path'.	Use

runtime/doc/usr_01.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*usr_01.txt*	For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2010 Nov 03
+*usr_01.txt*	For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2017 Jul 15
 
 		     VIM USER MANUAL - by Bram Moolenaar
 
@@ -140,19 +140,19 @@ On other systems, you have to do a little work:
 
 1. Copy the tutor file.  You can do this with Vim (it knows where to find it):
 >
-	vim -u NONE -c 'e $VIMRUNTIME/tutor/tutor' -c 'w! TUTORCOPY' -c 'q'
+	vim --clean -c 'e $VIMRUNTIME/tutor/tutor' -c 'w! TUTORCOPY' -c 'q'
 <
    This will write the file "TUTORCOPY" in the current directory.  To use a
 translated version of the tutor, append the two-letter language code to the
 filename.  For French:
 >
-	vim -u NONE -c 'e $VIMRUNTIME/tutor/tutor.fr' -c 'w! TUTORCOPY' -c 'q'
+	vim --clean -c 'e $VIMRUNTIME/tutor/tutor.fr' -c 'w! TUTORCOPY' -c 'q'
 <
 2. Edit the copied file with Vim:
 >
-	vim -u NONE -c "set nocp" TUTORCOPY
+	vim --clean TUTORCOPY
 <
-   The extra arguments make sure Vim is started in a good mood.
+   The --clean argument makes sure Vim is started with nice defaults.
 
 3. Delete the copied file when you are finished with it:
 >

runtime/doc/usr_03.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*usr_03.txt*	For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2016 Jan 05
+*usr_03.txt*	For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2017 Jul 21
 
 		     VIM USER MANUAL - by Bram Moolenaar
 
@@ -352,7 +352,7 @@ The "?" command works like "/" but searches backwards: >
 	?word
 
 The "N" command repeats the last search the opposite direction.  Thus using
-"N" after a "/" command search backwards, using "N" after "?" searches
+"N" after a "/" command searches backwards, using "N" after "?" searches
 forward.
 
 
@@ -512,7 +512,7 @@ only if it is at the beginning of a line.
    The $ character matches the end of a line.  Therefore, "was$" matches the
 word was only if it is at the end of a line.
 
-Let's mark the places where "the" matches in this example line with "x"s:
+Let's mark the places where "/the" matches in this example line with "x"s:
 
 	the solder holding one of the chips melted and the ~
 	xxx			  xxx		       xxx

runtime/doc/usr_07.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*usr_07.txt*	For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2006 Apr 24
+*usr_07.txt*	For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2017 Sep 18
 
 		     VIM USER MANUAL - by Bram Moolenaar
 
@@ -215,14 +215,14 @@ change: >
 
 	`.
 
-Suppose you are editing the file "one.txt".  Somewhere halfway the file you
+Suppose you are editing the file "one.txt".  Somewhere halfway through the
-use "x" to delete a character.  Then you go to the last line with "G" and
+file you use "x" to delete a character.  Then you go to the last line with "G"
-write the file with ":w".  You edit several other files, and then use ":edit
+and write the file with ":w".  You edit several other files, and then use
-one.txt" to come back to "one.txt".  If you now use `" Vim jumps to the last
+":edit one.txt" to come back to "one.txt".  If you now use `" Vim jumps to the
-line of the file.  Using `. takes you to the position where you deleted the
+last line of the file.  Using `. takes you to the position where you deleted
-character.  Even when you move around in the file `" and `. will take you to
+the character.  Even when you move around in the file `" and `. will take you
-the remembered position.  At least until you make another change or leave the
+to the remembered position.  At least until you make another change or leave
-file.
+the file.
 
 
 FILE MARKS
@@ -233,8 +233,8 @@ another file and place marks there, these are specific for that file.  Thus
 each file has its own set of marks, they are local to the file.
    So far we were using marks with a lowercase letter.  There are also marks
 with an uppercase letter.  These are global, they can be used from any file.
-For example suppose that we are editing the file "foo.txt".  Go to halfway the
+For example suppose that we are editing the file "foo.txt".  Go to halfway
-file ("50%") and place the F mark there (F for foo): >
+down the file ("50%") and place the F mark there (F for foo): >
 
 	50%mF
 
@@ -355,7 +355,7 @@ a sentence to the f register (f for First): >
 	"fyas
 
 The "yas" command yanks a sentence like before.  It's the "f that tells Vim
-the text should be place in the f register.  This must come just before the
+the text should be placed in the f register.  This must come just before the
 yank command.
    Now yank three whole lines to the l register (l for line): >
 

runtime/doc/usr_08.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*usr_08.txt*	For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2014 Jul 06
+*usr_08.txt*	For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2017 Aug 11
 
 		     VIM USER MANUAL - by Bram Moolenaar
 
@@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ top one:
 	+----------------------------------+
 
 What you see here is two windows on the same file.  The line with "====" is
-that status line.  It displays information about the window above it.  (In
+the status line.  It displays information about the window above it.  (In
 practice the status line will be in reverse video.)
    The two windows allow you to view two parts of the same file.  For example,
 you could make the top window show the variable declarations of a program, and

runtime/doc/usr_09.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*usr_09.txt*	For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2006 Apr 24
+*usr_09.txt*	For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2017 Aug 11
 
 		     VIM USER MANUAL - by Bram Moolenaar
 
@@ -60,7 +60,7 @@ THE WINDOW TITLE
 At the very top is the window title.  This is drawn by your window system.
 Vim will set the title to show the name of the current file.  First comes the
 name of the file.  Then some special characters and the directory of the file
-in parens.  These special character can be present:
+in parens.  These special characters can be present:
 
 	-	The file cannot be modified (e.g., a help file)
 	+	The file contains changes
@@ -206,7 +206,7 @@ the "real clipboard" are called clipboard, you'll have to get used to that.
    To put text on the real clipboard, select a few different words in one of
 the gVims you have running.  Then use the Edit/Copy menu entry.  Now the text
 has been copied to the real clipboard.  You can't see this, unless you have
-some application that shows the clipboard contents (e.g., KDE's klipper).
+some application that shows the clipboard contents (e.g., KDE's Klipper).
    Now select the other gVim, position the cursor somewhere and use the
 Edit/Paste menu.  You will see the text from the real clipboard is inserted.
 

runtime/doc/usr_12.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*usr_12.txt*	For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2007 May 11
+*usr_12.txt*	For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2017 Aug 11
 
 		     VIM USER MANUAL - by Bram Moolenaar
 
@@ -290,7 +290,7 @@ command: >
 The line range "%" is used, thus this works on the whole file.  The pattern
 that the ":substitute" command matches with is "\s\+$".  This finds white
 space characters (\s), 1 or more of them (\+), before the end-of-line ($).
-Later will be explained how you write patterns like this |usr_27.txt|.
+Later will be explained how you write patterns like this, see |usr_27.txt|.
    The "to" part of the substitute command is empty: "//".  Thus it replaces
 with nothing, effectively deleting the matched white space.
 

runtime/doc/usr_41.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*usr_41.txt*	For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2017 Mar 28
+*usr_41.txt*	For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2017 Aug 22
 
 		     VIM USER MANUAL - by Bram Moolenaar
 
@@ -966,6 +966,23 @@ Jobs:		    			        *job-functions*
 	job_info()		get information about a job
 	job_setoptions()	set options for a job
 
+Terminal window:				*terminal-functions*
+	term_start()		open a terminal window and run a job
+	term_list()		get the list of terminal buffers
+	term_sendkeys()		send keystrokes to a terminal
+	term_wait()		wait for screen to be updated
+	term_getjob()		get the job associated with a terminal
+	term_scrape()		get row of a terminal screen
+	term_getline()		get a line of text from a terminal
+	term_getattr()		get the value of attribute {what}
+	term_getcursor()	get the cursor position of a terminal
+	term_getscrolled()	get the scroll count of a terminal
+	term_getaltscreen()	get the alternate screen flag
+	term_getsize()		get the size of a terminal
+	term_getstatus()	get the status of a terminal
+	term_gettitle()		get the title of a terminal
+	term_gettty()		get the tty name of a terminal
+
 Timers:						*timer-functions*
 	timer_start()		create a timer
 	timer_pause()		pause or unpause a timer

runtime/doc/various.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*various.txt*   For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2017 Feb 24
+*various.txt*   For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2017 Sep 16
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -322,7 +322,7 @@ N  *+cindent*		|'cindent'|, C indenting
 N  *+clientserver*	Unix and Win32: Remote invocation |clientserver|
    *+clipboard*		|clipboard| support
 N  *+cmdline_compl*	command line completion |cmdline-completion|
-N  *+cmdline_hist*	command line history |cmdline-history|
+S  *+cmdline_hist*	command line history |cmdline-history|
 N  *+cmdline_info*	|'showcmd'| and |'ruler'|
 N  *+comments*		|'comments'| support
 B  *+conceal*		"conceal" support, see |conceal| |:syn-conceal| etc.
@@ -361,7 +361,7 @@ m  *+hangul_input*	Hangul input support |hangul|
    *+iconv/dyn*		Likewise |iconv-dynamic| |/dyn|
 N  *+insert_expand*	|insert_expand| Insert mode completion
 m  *+job*		starting and stopping jobs |job|
-N  *+jumplist*		|jumplist|
+S  *+jumplist*		|jumplist|
 B  *+keymap*		|'keymap'|
 N  *+lambda*		|lambda| and |closure|
 B  *+langmap*		|'langmap'|
@@ -427,6 +427,7 @@ N  *+tag_old_static*	old method for static tags |tag-old-static|
 m  *+tag_any_white*	any white space allowed in tags file |tag-any-white|
 m  *+tcl*		Tcl interface |tcl|
 m  *+tcl/dyn*		Tcl interface |tcl-dynamic| |/dyn|
+m  *+terminal*		Support for terminal window |terminal|
    *+terminfo*		uses |terminfo| instead of termcap
 N  *+termresponse*	support for |t_RV| and |v:termresponse|
 B  *+termguicolors*	24-bit color in xterm-compatible terminals support
@@ -437,14 +438,16 @@ N  *+title*		Setting the window 'title' and 'icon'
 N  *+toolbar*		|gui-toolbar|
 N  *+user_commands*	User-defined commands. |user-commands|
 N  *+viminfo*		|'viminfo'|
-N  *+vertsplit*		Vertically split windows |:vsplit|
+   *+vertsplit*		Vertically split windows |:vsplit|; Always enabled
+			since 8.0.1118.
+			in sync with the |+windows| feature
 N  *+virtualedit*	|'virtualedit'|
 S  *+visual*		Visual mode |Visual-mode| Always enabled since 7.4.200.
 N  *+visualextra*	extra Visual mode commands |blockwise-operators|
 N  *+vreplace*		|gR| and |gr|
 N  *+wildignore*	|'wildignore'|
 N  *+wildmenu*		|'wildmenu'|
-S  *+windows*		more than one window
+   *+windows*		more than one window; Always enabled sinde 8.0.1118.
 m  *+writebackup*	|'writebackup'| is default on
 m  *+xim*		X input method |xim|
    *+xfontset*		X fontset support |xfontset|

runtime/doc/version8.txt

@@ -16827,7 +16827,7 @@ Patch 8.0.0388
 Problem:    filtering lines through "cat", without changing the line count,
             changes manual folds.
 Solution:   Change how marks and folds are adjusted. (Matthew Malcomson, from
-            neovim #6194.
+            neovim #6194).
 Files:      src/fold.c, src/testdir/test_fold.vim
 
 Patch 8.0.0389
@@ -17499,7 +17499,7 @@ Files:      src/evalfunc.c, src/if_xcmdsrv.c, src/proto/if_xcmdsrv.pro,
 
 Patch 8.0.0493
 Problem:    Crash with cd command with very long argument.
-Solution:   Check for running out of space. (Dominique pending, closes #1576)
+Solution:   Check for running out of space. (Dominique Pelle, closes #1576)
 Files:      src/testdir/test_alot.vim, src/testdir/test_cd.vim, src/Makefile,
             src/misc2.c
 

runtime/doc/vim.1

@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 .TH VIM 1 "2006 Apr 11"
 .SH NAME
-vim \- Vi IMproved, a programmers text editor
+vim \- Vi IMproved, a programmer's text editor
 .SH SYNOPSIS
 .br
 .B vim
@@ -325,7 +325,7 @@ You can still edit the buffer, but will be prevented from accidentally
 overwriting a file.
 If you do want to overwrite a file, add an exclamation mark to the Ex command,
 as in ":w!".
-The \-R option also implies the \-n option (see below).
+The \-R option also implies the \-n option (see above).
 The 'readonly' option can be reset with ":set noro".
 See ":help 'readonly'".
 .TP

runtime/doc/vim.man

@@ -3,7 +3,7 @@ VIM(1)                      General Commands Manual                     VIM(1)
 
 
 NAME
-       vim - Vi IMproved, a programmers text editor
+       vim - Vi IMproved, a programmer's text editor
 
 SYNOPSIS
        vim [options] [file ..]
@@ -225,7 +225,7 @@ OPTIONS
                    dentally overwriting a file.  If you do want to overwrite a
                    file, add an exclamation mark to  the  Ex  command,  as  in
                    ":w!".   The  -R  option  also  implies  the -n option (see
-                   below).  The 'readonly' option  can  be  reset  with  ":set
+                   above).  The 'readonly' option  can  be  reset  with  ":set
                    noro".  See ":help 'readonly'".
 
        -r          List  swap  files,  with  information  about using them for

runtime/doc/visual.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*visual.txt*    For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2014 Mar 23
+*visual.txt*    For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2017 Sep 02
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -314,8 +314,8 @@ Visual-block Insert						*v_b_I*
 With a blockwise selection, I{string}<ESC> will insert {string} at the start
 of block on every line of the block, provided that the line extends into the
 block.  Thus lines that are short will remain unmodified.  TABs are split to
-retain visual columns.
+retain visual columns.  Works only for adding text to a line, not for
-See |v_b_I_example|.
+deletions.  See |v_b_I_example|.
 
 Visual-block Append						*v_b_A*
 With a blockwise selection, A{string}<ESC> will append {string} to the end of
@@ -331,6 +331,7 @@ See |v_b_A_example|.
 Note: "I" and "A" behave differently for lines that don't extend into the
 selected block.  This was done intentionally, so that you can do it the way
 you want.
+Works only for adding text to a line, not for deletions.
 
 Visual-block change						*v_b_c*
 All selected text in the block will be replaced by the same text string.  When

runtime/doc/windows.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*windows.txt*   For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2016 Dec 01
+*windows.txt*   For Vim version 8.0.  Last change: 2017 Sep 25
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -222,6 +222,11 @@ CTRL-W ^	Does ":split #", split window in two and edit alternate file.
 		When a count is given, it becomes ":split #N", split window
 		and edit buffer N.
 
+						*CTRL-W_:*
+CTRL-W :	Does the same as typing |:| : edit a command line.  Useful in a
+		terminal window, where all Vim commands must be preceded with
+		CTRL-W or 'termkey'.
+
 Note that the 'splitbelow' and 'splitright' options influence where a new
 window will appear.
 
@@ -339,8 +344,9 @@ CTRL-W CTRL-C						*CTRL-W_CTRL-C*
 							*:hide*
 :hid[e]
 :{count}hid[e]
-		Quit the current window, unless it is the last window on the
+		Without {count}: Quit the current window, unless it is the
-		screen.  For {count} see |:quit| command.
+		last window on the screen.
+		If {count} is given quit the {count} window.
 		
 		The buffer becomes hidden (unless there is another window
 		editing it or 'bufhidden' is "unload", "delete" or "wipe").
@@ -613,7 +619,8 @@ The minimal height and width of a window is set with 'winminheight' and
 41. :buffers		list of buffers
 
 The meaning of [N] depends on the command:
- [N] is number of buffers to go forward/backward on ?2, ?3, and ?4
+ [N] is the number of buffers to go forward/backward on 2/12/22/32,
+     3/13/23/33, and 4/14/24/34
  [N] is an argument number, defaulting to current argument, for 1 and 21
  [N] is a buffer number, defaulting to current buffer, for 11 and 31
  [N] is a count for 19 and 39
@@ -1026,6 +1033,9 @@ list of buffers. |unlisted-buffer|
 			   displayed in a window |hidden-buffer|
 		   -	a buffer with 'modifiable' off
 		   =	a readonly buffer
+		   R	a terminal buffer with a running job
+		   F	a terminal buffer with a finished job
+		   ?    a terminal buffer without a job: `:terminal NONE`
 		    +	a modified buffer
 		    x   a buffer with read errors
 
@@ -1272,6 +1282,9 @@ help		Contains a help file.  Will only be created with the |:help|
 		and can't be changed.  The 'buflisted' option will be reset
 		for a help buffer.
 
+terminal	A terminal window buffer, see |terminal|. The contents cannot
+		be read or changed until the job ends.
+
 directory	Displays directory contents.  Can be used by a file explorer
 		plugin.  The buffer is created with these settings: >
 			:setlocal buftype=nowrite

runtime/evim.vim

@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 " Vim script for Evim key bindings
 " Maintainer:	Bram Moolenaar <Bram@vim.org>
-" Last Change:	2016 Jul 24
+" Last Change:	2017 Sep 20
 
 " Don't use Vi-compatible mode.
 set nocompatible
@@ -67,8 +67,10 @@ endif " has("autocmd")
 "
 " The matchit plugin makes the % command work better, but it is not backwards
 " compatible.
+" The ! means the package won't be loaded right away but when plugins are
+" loaded during initialization.
 if has('syntax') && has('eval')
-  packadd matchit
+  packadd! matchit
 endif
 
 " vim: set sw=2 :

runtime/filetype.vim

@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
 " Vim support file to detect file types
 "
 " Maintainer:	Bram Moolenaar <Bram@vim.org>
-" Last Change:	2017 Jun 04
+" Last Change:	2017 Aug 11
 
 " Listen very carefully, I will say this only once
 if exists("did_load_filetypes")
@@ -48,6 +48,9 @@ func! s:StarSetf(ft)
   endif
 endfunc
 
+" Vim help file
+au BufNewFile,BufRead $VIMRUNTIME/doc/*.txt	setf help
+
 " Abaqus or Trasys
 au BufNewFile,BufRead *.inp			call s:Check_inp()
 
@@ -632,7 +635,13 @@ au BufNewFile,BufRead dict.conf,.dictrc		setf dictconf
 au BufNewFile,BufRead dictd.conf		setf dictdconf
 
 " Diff files
-au BufNewFile,BufRead *.diff,*.rej,*.patch	setf diff
+au BufNewFile,BufRead *.diff,*.rej		setf diff
+au BufNewFile,BufRead *.patch
+	\ if getline(1) =~ '^From [0-9a-f]\{40\} Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001$' |
+	\   setf gitsendemail |
+	\ else |
+	\   setf diff |
+	\ endif
 
 " Dircolors
 au BufNewFile,BufRead .dir_colors,.dircolors,*/etc/DIR_COLORS	setf dircolors
@@ -801,6 +810,7 @@ if !empty($XDG_CONFIG_HOME)
   au BufNewFile,BufRead $XDG_CONFIG_HOME/git/config	setf gitconfig
 endif
 au BufNewFile,BufRead git-rebase-todo		setf gitrebase
+au BufRead,BufNewFile .gitsendemail.msg.??????	setf gitsendemail
 au BufNewFile,BufRead .msg.[0-9]*
       \ if getline(1) =~ '^From.*# This line is ignored.$' |
       \   setf gitsendemail |
@@ -1017,7 +1027,7 @@ au BufNewFile,BufRead *.java,*.jav		setf java
 au BufNewFile,BufRead *.jj,*.jjt		setf javacc
 
 " JavaScript, ECMAScript
-au BufNewFile,BufRead *.js,*.javascript,*.es,*.jsx   setf javascript
+au BufNewFile,BufRead *.js,*.javascript,*.es,*.jsx,*.mjs   setf javascript
 
 " Java Server Pages
 au BufNewFile,BufRead *.jsp			setf jsp
@@ -1332,6 +1342,9 @@ au BufNewFile,BufRead *.mush			setf mush
 " Mutt setup file (also for Muttng)
 au BufNewFile,BufRead Mutt{ng,}rc		setf muttrc
 
+" N1QL
+au BufRead,BufNewfile *.n1ql,*.nql		setf n1ql
+
 " Nano
 au BufNewFile,BufRead */etc/nanorc,*.nanorc  	setf nanorc
 
@@ -2253,8 +2266,12 @@ func! s:FTtex()
     let format = tolower(matchstr(firstline, '\a\+'))
     let format = substitute(format, 'pdf', '', '')
     if format == 'tex'
+      let format = 'latex'
+    elseif format == 'plaintex'
       let format = 'plain'
     endif
+  elseif expand('%') =~ 'tex/context/.*/.*.tex'
+    let format = 'context'
   else
     " Default value, may be changed later:
     let format = exists("g:tex_flavor") ? g:tex_flavor : 'plain'
@@ -2296,7 +2313,7 @@ func! s:FTtex()
 endfunc
 
 " ConTeXt
-au BufNewFile,BufRead tex/context/*/*.tex,*.mkii,*.mkiv,*.mkvi   setf context
+au BufNewFile,BufRead *.mkii,*.mkiv,*.mkvi   setf context
 
 " Texinfo
 au BufNewFile,BufRead *.texinfo,*.texi,*.txi	setf texinfo
@@ -2784,7 +2801,13 @@ au BufNewFile,BufRead zsh*,zlog*		call s:StarSetf('zsh')
 
 " Plain text files, needs to be far down to not override others.  This avoids
 " the "conf" type being used if there is a line starting with '#'.
-au BufNewFile,BufRead *.txt,*.text,README	setf text
+au BufNewFile,BufRead *.text,README		setf text
+
+" Help files match *.txt but should have a last line that is a modeline.
+au BufNewFile,BufRead *.txt	
+	\  if getline('$') !~ 'vim:.*ft=help'
+	\|   setf text
+	\| endif
 
 
 " Use the filetype detect plugins.  They may overrule any of the previously

runtime/ftplugin/perl.vim

@@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
 " Maintainer:    vim-perl <vim-perl@googlegroups.com>
 " Homepage:      http://github.com/vim-perl/vim-perl
 " Bugs/requests: http://github.com/vim-perl/vim-perl/issues
-" Last Change:   2013-07-21
+" Last Change:   2015-02-09
 
 if exists("b:did_ftplugin") | finish | endif
 let b:did_ftplugin = 1
@@ -33,14 +33,14 @@ endif
 setlocal include=\\<\\(use\\\|require\\)\\>
 setlocal includeexpr=substitute(substitute(substitute(v:fname,'::','/','g'),'->\*','',''),'$','.pm','')
 setlocal define=[^A-Za-z_]
+setlocal iskeyword+=:
 
 " The following line changes a global variable but is necessary to make
-" gf and similar commands work.  The change to iskeyword was incorrect.
+" gf and similar commands work. Thanks to Andrew Pimlott for pointing
-" Thanks to Andrew Pimlott for pointing out the problem. If this causes a
+" out the problem. If this causes a problem for you, add an
-" problem for you, add an after/ftplugin/perl.vim file that contains
+" after/ftplugin/perl.vim file that contains
 "       set isfname-=:
 set isfname+=:
-set iskeyword+=:
 
 " Set this once, globally.
 if !exists("perlpath")
@@ -77,11 +77,12 @@ endif
 "---------------------------------------------
 
 " Undo the stuff we changed.
-let b:undo_ftplugin = "setlocal fo< com< cms< inc< inex< def< isf< kp< path<" .
+let b:undo_ftplugin = "setlocal fo< com< cms< inc< inex< def< isk< isf< kp< path<" .
 	    \	      " | unlet! b:browsefilter"
 
 " proper matching for matchit plugin
 let b:match_skip = 's:comment\|string\|perlQQ\|perlShellCommand\|perlHereDoc\|perlSubstitution\|perlTranslation\|perlMatch\|perlFormatField'
+let b:match_words = '\<if\>:\<elsif\>:\<else\>'
 
 " Restore the saved compatibility options.
 let &cpo = s:save_cpo

runtime/ftplugin/verilog.vim

@@ -1,8 +1,12 @@
 " Vim filetype plugin file
 " Language:	Verilog HDL
-" Maintainer:	Chih-Tsun Huang <cthuang@larc.ee.nthu.edu.tw>
+" Maintainer:	Chih-Tsun Huang <cthuang@cs.nthu.edu.tw>
-" Last Change:	Wed Sep  3 15:24:49 CST 2008
+" Last Change:	2017 Aug 25 by Chih-Tsun Huang
-" URL:		http://larc.ee.nthu.edu.tw/~cthuang/vim/ftplugin/verilog.vim
+" URL:	    	http://www.cs.nthu.edu.tw/~cthuang/vim/ftplugin/verilog.vim
+"
+" Credits:
+"   Suggestions for improvement, bug reports by
+"     Shao <shaominghai2005@163.com>
 
 " Only do this when not done yet for this buffer
 if exists("b:did_ftplugin")
@@ -45,11 +49,16 @@ if exists("loaded_matchit")
     \ '\<begin\>:\<end\>,' .
     \ '\<case\>\|\<casex\>\|\<casez\>:\<endcase\>,' .
     \ '\<module\>:\<endmodule\>,' .
-    \ '\<if\>:\<else\>,' .
+    \ '\<if\>:`\@<!\<else\>,' .
     \ '\<function\>:\<endfunction\>,' .
-    \ '`ifdef\>:`else\>:`endif\>,' .
+    \ '`ifn\?def\>:`elsif\>:`else\>:`endif\>,' .
     \ '\<task\>:\<endtask\>,' .
-    \ '\<specify\>:\<endspecify\>'
+    \ '\<specify\>:\<endspecify\>,' .
+    \ '\<config\>:\<endconfig\>,' .
+    \ '\<generate\>:\<endgenerate\>,' .
+    \ '\<fork\>:\<join\>,' .
+    \ '\<primitive\>:\<endprimitive\>,' .
+    \ '\<table\>:\<endtable\>'
 endif
 
 " Reset 'cpoptions' back to the user's setting

runtime/ftplugin/zsh.vim

@@ -1,10 +1,10 @@
 " Vim filetype plugin file
-" Language:		Zsh shell script
+" Language:             Zsh shell script
-" Maintainer:		Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
+" Maintainer:           Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
-" Previous Maintainer:	Nikolai Weibull <now@bitwi.se>
+" Previous Maintainer:  Nikolai Weibull <now@bitwi.se>
-" Latest Revision:	2015-05-29
+" Latest Revision:      2015-05-29
-" License:		Vim (see :h license)
+" License:              Vim (see :h license)
-" Repository:		https://github.com/chrisbra/vim-zsh
+" Repository:           https://github.com/chrisbra/vim-zsh
 
 if exists("b:did_ftplugin")
   finish

runtime/indent/ada.vim

@@ -87,7 +87,7 @@ function s:MainBlockIndent (prev_indent, prev_lnum, blockstart, stop_at)
       endwhile
    endwhile
    " Fallback - just move back one
-   return a:prev_indent - &sw
+   return a:prev_indent - shiftwidth()
 endfunction MainBlockIndent
 
 " Section: s:EndBlockIndent {{{1
@@ -131,7 +131,7 @@ function s:EndBlockIndent( prev_indent, prev_lnum, blockstart, blockend )
       endwhile
    endwhile
    " Fallback - just move back one
-   return a:prev_indent - &sw
+   return a:prev_indent - shiftwidth()
 endfunction EndBlockIndent
 
 " Section: s:StatementIndent {{{1
@@ -213,15 +213,15 @@ function GetAdaIndent()
       endif
       " Move indent in
       if ! false_match
-	 let ind = ind + &sw
+	 let ind = ind + shiftwidth()
       endif
    elseif line =~ '^\s*\(case\|exception\)\>'
       " Move indent in twice (next 'when' will move back)
-      let ind = ind + 2 * &sw
+      let ind = ind + 2 * shiftwidth()
    elseif line =~ '^\s*end\s*record\>'
       " Move indent back to tallying 'type' preceeding the 'record'.
       " Allow indent to be equal to 'end record's.
-      let ind = s:MainBlockIndent( ind+&sw, lnum, 'type\>', '' )
+      let ind = s:MainBlockIndent( ind+shiftwidth(), lnum, 'type\>', '' )
    elseif line =~ '\(^\s*new\>.*\)\@<!)\s*[;,]\s*$'
       " Revert to indent of line that started this parenthesis pair
       exe lnum
@@ -235,10 +235,10 @@ function GetAdaIndent()
       exe v:lnum
    elseif line =~ '[.=(]\s*$'
       " A statement continuation - move in one
-      let ind = ind + &sw
+      let ind = ind + shiftwidth()
    elseif line =~ '^\s*new\>'
       " Multiple line generic instantiation ('package blah is\nnew thingy')
-      let ind = s:StatementIndent( ind - &sw, lnum )
+      let ind = s:StatementIndent( ind - shiftwidth(), lnum )
    elseif line =~ ';\s*$'
       " Statement end (but not 'end' ) - try to find current statement-start indent
       let ind = s:StatementIndent( ind, lnum )
@@ -256,17 +256,17 @@ function GetAdaIndent()
    elseif continuation && line =~ '^\s*('
       " Don't do this if we've already indented due to the previous line
       if ind == initind
-	 let ind = ind + &sw
+	 let ind = ind + shiftwidth()
       endif
    elseif line =~ '^\s*\(begin\|is\)\>'
       let ind = s:MainBlockIndent( ind, lnum, '\(procedure\|function\|declare\|package\|task\)\>', 'begin\>' )
    elseif line =~ '^\s*record\>'
-      let ind = s:MainBlockIndent( ind, lnum, 'type\>\|for\>.*\<use\>', '' ) + &sw
+      let ind = s:MainBlockIndent( ind, lnum, 'type\>\|for\>.*\<use\>', '' ) + shiftwidth()
    elseif line =~ '^\s*\(else\|elsif\)\>'
       let ind = s:MainBlockIndent( ind, lnum, 'if\>', '' )
    elseif line =~ '^\s*when\>'
       " Align 'when' one /in/ from matching block start
-      let ind = s:MainBlockIndent( ind, lnum, '\(case\|exception\)\>', '' ) + &sw
+      let ind = s:MainBlockIndent( ind, lnum, '\(case\|exception\)\>', '' ) + shiftwidth()
    elseif line =~ '^\s*end\>\s*\<if\>'
       " End of if statements
       let ind = s:EndBlockIndent( ind, lnum, 'if\>', 'end\>\s*\<if\>' )

runtime/indent/awk.vim

@@ -60,7 +60,7 @@ function! GetAwkIndent()
    " 'pattern { action }' (simple check match on /{/ increases the indent then)
 
    if s:Get_brace_balance( prev_data, '{', '}' ) > 0
-      return ind + &sw
+      return ind + shiftwidth()
    endif
 
    let brace_balance = s:Get_brace_balance( prev_data, '(', ')' )
@@ -99,7 +99,7 @@ function! GetAwkIndent()
 	  return s:Safe_indent( ind, s:First_word_len(prev_data), getline(v:lnum))
        else
 	 " if/for/while without '{'
-	 return ind + &sw
+	 return ind + shiftwidth()
        endif
      endif
    endif
@@ -140,7 +140,7 @@ function! GetAwkIndent()
 
    " Decrease indent if this line contains a '}'.
    if getline(v:lnum) =~ '^\s*}'
-      let ind = ind - &sw
+      let ind = ind - shiftwidth()
    endif
 
    return ind

runtime/indent/bst.vim

@@ -69,7 +69,7 @@ function! GetBstIndent(lnum) abort
     endif
     let fakeline = substitute(line,'^}','','').matchstr(cline,'^}')
     let ind = indent(lnum)
-    let ind = ind + &sw * s:count(line,'{')
+    let ind = ind + shiftwidth() * s:count(line,'{')
-    let ind = ind - &sw * s:count(fakeline,'}')
+    let ind = ind - shiftwidth() * s:count(fakeline,'}')
     return ind
 endfunction

runtime/indent/bzl.vim

@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
 " Vim indent file
 " Language:	Bazel (http://bazel.io)
 " Maintainer:	David Barnett (https://github.com/google/vim-ft-bzl)
-" Last Change:	2015 Aug 11
+" Last Change:	2017 Jun 13
 
 if exists('b:did_indent')
   finish
@@ -41,11 +41,8 @@ function GetBzlIndent(lnum) abort
     if exists('g:pyindent_open_paren')
       let l:pyindent_open_paren = g:pyindent_open_paren
     endif
-    " Vim 7.3.693 and later defines a shiftwidth() function to get the effective
+    let g:pyindent_nested_paren = 'shiftwidth() * 2'
-    " shiftwidth value. Fall back to &shiftwidth if the function doesn't exist.
+    let g:pyindent_open_paren = 'shiftwidth() * 2'
-    let l:sw_expr = exists('*shiftwidth') ? 'shiftwidth()' : '&shiftwidth'
-    let g:pyindent_nested_paren = l:sw_expr . ' * 2'
-    let g:pyindent_open_paren = l:sw_expr . ' * 2'
   endif
 
   let l:indent = -1

runtime/indent/cdl.vim

@@ -47,7 +47,7 @@ fun! CdlGetIndent(lnum)
   let thisline = getline(a:lnum)
   if match(thisline, '^\s*\(\k\+\|\[[^]]*]\)\s*\(,\|;\s*$\)') >= 0
     " it's an attributes line
-    return &sw
+    return shiftwidth()
   elseif match(thisline, '^\c\s*\([{}]\|\/[*/]\|dimension\|schedule\|group\|hierarchy\|class\)') >= 0
     " it's a header or '{' or '}' or a comment
     return 0
@@ -71,13 +71,13 @@ fun! CdlGetIndent(lnum)
     let c = line[inicio-1]
     " ')' and '=' don't change indent and are useless to set 'f'
     if c == '{'
-      return &sw
+      return shiftwidth()
     elseif c != ')' && c != '='
       let f = 1 " all but 'elseif' are followed by a formula
       if c ==? 'n' || c ==? 'e' " 'then', 'else'
-	let ind = ind + &sw
+	let ind = ind + shiftwidth()
       elseif strpart(line, inicio-6, 6) ==? 'elseif' " elseif, set f to conditional
-	let ind = ind + &sw
+	let ind = ind + shiftwidth()
 	let f = 0
       end
     end
@@ -98,16 +98,16 @@ fun! CdlGetIndent(lnum)
       let ind = 0
       let f = 1
     elseif c == ')' || c== ';' || strpart(line, inicio-5, 5) ==? 'endif'
-      let ind = ind - &sw
+      let ind = ind - shiftwidth()
     elseif c == '(' || c ==? 'f' " '(' or 'if'
-      let ind = ind + &sw
+      let ind = ind + shiftwidth()
     else " c == '='
       " if it is an asignment increase indent
       if f == -1 " we don't know yet, find out
 	let f = CdlAsignment(lnum, strpart(line, 0, inicio))
       end
       if f == 1 " formula increase it
-	let ind = ind + &sw
+	let ind = ind + shiftwidth()
       end
     end
   endw
@@ -115,13 +115,13 @@ fun! CdlGetIndent(lnum)
   " CURRENT LINE, if it starts with a closing element, decrease indent
   " or if it starts with '=' (asignment), increase indent
   if match(thisline, '^\c\s*\(else\|then\|endif\|[);]\)') >= 0
-    let ind = ind - &sw
+    let ind = ind - shiftwidth()
   elseif match(thisline, '^\s*=') >= 0
     if f == -1 " we don't know yet if is an asignment, find out
       let f = CdlAsignment(lnum, "")
     end
     if f == 1 " formula increase it
-      let ind = ind + &sw
+      let ind = ind + shiftwidth()
     end
   end
 

runtime/indent/chaiscript.vim

@@ -31,19 +31,19 @@ function! GetChaiScriptIndent()
   let flag = 0
   let prevline = getline(lnum)
   if prevline =~ '^.*{.*'
-    let ind = ind + &shiftwidth
+    let ind = ind + shiftwidth()
     let flag = 1
   endif
 
   " Subtract a 'shiftwidth' after lines containing a { followed by a }
   " to keep it balanced
   if flag == 1 && prevline =~ '.*{.*}.*'
-    let ind = ind - &shiftwidth
+    let ind = ind - shiftwidth()
   endif
 
   " Subtract a 'shiftwidth' on lines ending with }
   if getline(v:lnum) =~ '^\s*\%(}\)'
-    let ind = ind - &shiftwidth
+    let ind = ind - shiftwidth()
   endif
 
   return ind

runtime/indent/clojure.vim

@@ -261,7 +261,7 @@ if exists("*searchpairpos")
 		call cursor(paren)
 
 		if s:is_method_special_case(paren)
-			return [paren[0], paren[1] + &shiftwidth - 1]
+			return [paren[0], paren[1] + shiftwidth() - 1]
 		endif
 
 		if s:is_reader_conditional_special_case(paren)
@@ -299,19 +299,19 @@ if exists("*searchpairpos")
 		let ww = s:strip_namespace_and_macro_chars(w)
 
 		if &lispwords =~# '\V\<' . ww . '\>'
-			return [paren[0], paren[1] + &shiftwidth - 1]
+			return [paren[0], paren[1] + shiftwidth() - 1]
 		endif
 
 		if g:clojure_fuzzy_indent
 			\ && !s:match_one(g:clojure_fuzzy_indent_blacklist, ww)
 			\ && s:match_one(g:clojure_fuzzy_indent_patterns, ww)
-			return [paren[0], paren[1] + &shiftwidth - 1]
+			return [paren[0], paren[1] + shiftwidth() - 1]
 		endif
 
 		call search('\v\_s', 'cW')
 		call search('\v\S', 'W')
 		if paren[0] < line(".")
-			return [paren[0], paren[1] + (g:clojure_align_subforms ? 0 : &shiftwidth - 1)]
+			return [paren[0], paren[1] + (g:clojure_align_subforms ? 0 : shiftwidth() - 1)]
 		endif
 
 		call search('\v\S', 'bW')

runtime/indent/cmake.vim

@@ -1,14 +1,12 @@
 " Vim indent file
-" Program:      CMake - Cross-Platform Makefile Generator
-" Module:       $RCSfile: cmake-indent.vim,v $
 " Language:     CMake (ft=cmake)
 " Author:       Andy Cedilnik <andy.cedilnik@kitware.com>
-" Maintainer:   Karthik Krishnan <karthik.krishnan@kitware.com>
+" Maintainer:   Dimitri Merejkowsky <d.merej@gmail.com>
-" Last Change:  $Date: 2008-01-16 16:53:53 $
+" Former Maintainer: Karthik Krishnan <karthik.krishnan@kitware.com>
-" Version:      $Revision: 1.9 $
+" Last Change:  2017 Sep 24
 "
 " Licence:      The CMake license applies to this file. See
-"               http://www.cmake.org/HTML/Copyright.html
+"               https://cmake.org/licensing
 "               This implies that distribution with Vim is allowed
 
 if exists("b:did_indent")
@@ -68,19 +66,19 @@ fun! CMakeGetIndent(lnum)
     let ind = ind
   else
     if previous_line =~? cmake_indent_begin_regex
-      let ind = ind + &sw
+      let ind = ind + shiftwidth()
     endif
     if previous_line =~? cmake_indent_open_regex
-      let ind = ind + &sw
+      let ind = ind + shiftwidth()
     endif
   endif
 
   " Subtract
   if this_line =~? cmake_indent_end_regex
-    let ind = ind - &sw
+    let ind = ind - shiftwidth()
   endif
   if previous_line =~? cmake_indent_close_regex
-    let ind = ind - &sw
+    let ind = ind - shiftwidth()
   endif
 
   return ind

runtime/indent/cobol.vim

@@ -52,11 +52,11 @@ function! s:optionalblock(lnum,ind,blocks,clauses)
         if getline(lastclause) =~? clauses && s:stripped(lastclause) !~? '^'.begin
             let ind = indent(lastclause)
         elseif lastclause > 0
-            let ind = indent(lastclause) + &sw
+            let ind = indent(lastclause) + shiftwidth()
-            "let ind = ind + &sw
+            "let ind = ind + shiftwidth()
         endif
     elseif line =~? clauses && cline !~? end
-        let ind = ind + &sw
+        let ind = ind + shiftwidth()
     endif
     return ind
 endfunction
@@ -98,8 +98,8 @@ function! GetCobolIndent(lnum) abort
                 let num = matchstr(line,'^\s*\zs\d\+\>')
                 if 0+cnum == num
                     return lindent
-                elseif 0+cnum > num && default < lindent + &sw
+                elseif 0+cnum > num && default < lindent + shiftwidth()
-                    let default = lindent + &sw
+                    let default = lindent + shiftwidth()
                 endif
             elseif lindent < bshft && lindent >= ashft
                 break
@@ -135,13 +135,13 @@ function! GetCobolIndent(lnum) abort
     if line =~? '^PERFORM\>'
         let perfline = substitute(line, '\c^PERFORM\s*', "", "")
         if perfline =~? '^\%(\k\+\s\+TIMES\)\=\s*$'
-            let ind = ind + &sw
+            let ind = ind + shiftwidth()
         elseif perfline =~? '^\%(WITH\s\+TEST\|VARYING\|UNTIL\)\>.*[^.]$'
-            let ind = ind + &sw
+            let ind = ind + shiftwidth()
         endif
     endif
     if line =~? '^\%(IF\|THEN\|ELSE\|READ\|EVALUATE\|SEARCH\|SELECT\)\>'
-        let ind = ind + &sw
+        let ind = ind + shiftwidth()
     endif
     let ind = s:optionalblock(a:lnum,ind,'ADD\|COMPUTE\|DIVIDE\|MULTIPLY\|SUBTRACT','ON\s\+SIZE\s\+ERROR')
     let ind = s:optionalblock(a:lnum,ind,'STRING\|UNSTRING\|ACCEPT\|DISPLAY\|CALL','ON\s\+OVERFLOW\|ON\s\+EXCEPTION')
@@ -157,10 +157,10 @@ function! GetCobolIndent(lnum) abort
             "&& s:stripped(lastclause) !~? '^\%(SEARCH\|EVALUATE\|READ\)\>'
             let ind = indent(lastclause)
         elseif lastclause > 0
-            let ind = indent(lastclause) + &sw
+            let ind = indent(lastclause) + shiftwidth()
         endif
     elseif line =~? '^WHEN\>'
-        let ind = ind + &sw
+        let ind = ind + shiftwidth()
     endif
     "I'm not sure why I had this
     "if line =~? '^ELSE\>-\@!' && line !~? '\.$'
@@ -168,7 +168,7 @@ function! GetCobolIndent(lnum) abort
     "endif
     if cline =~? '^\(END\)\>-\@!'
         " On lines with just END, 'guess' a simple shift left
-        let ind = ind - &sw
+        let ind = ind - shiftwidth()
     elseif cline =~? '^\(END-IF\|THEN\|ELSE\)\>-\@!'
         call cursor(a:lnum,indent(a:lnum))
         let match = searchpair('\c-\@<!\<IF\>','\c-\@<!\%(THEN\|ELSE\)\>','\c-\@<!\<END-IF\>\zs','bnW',s:skip)
@@ -209,7 +209,7 @@ function! GetCobolIndent(lnum) abort
         if match > 0
             let ind = indent(match)
         elseif cline =~? '^\(END-\(READ\|EVALUATE\|SEARCH\|PERFORM\)\)\>'
-            let ind = ind - &sw
+            let ind = ind - shiftwidth()
         endif
     endif
     return ind < bshft ? bshft : ind

runtime/indent/cucumber.vim

@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
 " Vim indent file
 " Language:	Cucumber
 " Maintainer:	Tim Pope <vimNOSPAM@tpope.org>
-" Last Change:	2016 Aug 29
+" Last Change:	2017 Jun 13
 
 if exists("b:did_indent")
   finish
@@ -27,7 +27,7 @@ function! GetCucumberIndent()
   let line  = getline(prevnonblank(v:lnum-1))
   let cline = getline(v:lnum)
   let nline = getline(nextnonblank(v:lnum+1))
-  let sw = exists('*shiftwidth') ? shiftwidth() : &sw
+  let sw = exists('*shiftwidth') ? shiftwidth() : shiftwidth()
   let syn = s:syn(prevnonblank(v:lnum-1))
   let csyn = s:syn(v:lnum)
   let nsyn = s:syn(nextnonblank(v:lnum+1))

runtime/indent/dylan.vim

@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
 " Vim indent file
 " Language:	Dylan
 " Version:	0.01
-" Last Change:	2003 Feb 04
+" Last Change:	2017 Jun 13
 " Maintainer:	Brent A. Fulgham <bfulgham@debian.org>
 
 " Only load this indent file when no other was loaded.
@@ -45,13 +45,13 @@ function DylanGetIndent()
 
   " If previous line was a 'define', indent
   if prevline =~? '\(^\s*\(begin\|block\|case\|define\|else\|elseif\|for\|finally\|if\|select\|unless\|while\)\|\s*\S*\s*=>$\)'
-    let chg = &sw
+    let chg = shiftwidth()
   " local methods indent the shift-width, plus 6 for the 'local'
   elseif prevline =~? '^\s*local'
-    let chg = &sw + 6
+    let chg = shiftwidth() + 6
   " If previous line was a let with no closing semicolon, indent
   elseif prevline =~? '^\s*let.*[^;]\s*$'
-    let chg = &sw
+    let chg = shiftwidth()
   " If previous line opened a parenthesis, and did not close it, indent
   elseif prevline =~ '^.*(\s*[^)]*\((.*)\)*[^)]*$'
     return = match( prevline, '(.*\((.*)\|[^)]\)*.*$') + 1
@@ -75,13 +75,13 @@ function DylanGetIndent()
     " line doesn't start with an indentable command:
     let curr_str = getline(curr_line)
     if curr_str =~? '^\s*\(begin\|block\|case\|define\|else\|elseif\|for\|finally\|if\|select\|unless\|while\)'
-      let chg = &sw
+      let chg = shiftwidth()
     endif
   endif
 
   " If a line starts with end, un-indent (even if we just indented!)
   if cline =~? '^\s*\(cleanup\|end\|else\|elseif\|exception\|finally\|otherwise\)'
-    let chg = chg - &sw
+    let chg = chg - shiftwidth()
   endif
 
   return ind + chg

runtime/indent/erlang.vim

@@ -669,7 +669,7 @@ function! s:BeginningOfClauseFound(stack, token, stored_vcol)
     call s:Pop(a:stack)
     if empty(a:stack)
       call s:Log('    Stack is ["when"], so LTI is in a guard -> return')
-      return [1, a:stored_vcol + &sw + 2]
+      return [1, a:stored_vcol + shiftwidth() + 2]
     else
       return [1, s:UnexpectedToken(a:token, a:stack)]
     endif
@@ -678,7 +678,7 @@ function! s:BeginningOfClauseFound(stack, token, stored_vcol)
     call s:Pop(a:stack)
     if empty(a:stack)
       call s:Log('    Stack is ["->"], so LTI is in function body -> return')
-      return [1, a:stored_vcol + &sw]
+      return [1, a:stored_vcol + shiftwidth()]
     elseif a:stack[0] ==# ';'
       call s:Pop(a:stack)
       if empty(a:stack)
@@ -797,7 +797,7 @@ function! s:ErlangCalcIndent2(lnum, stack)
 
       elseif token ==# 'begin'
         let [ret, res] = s:BeginElementFound(stack, token, curr_vcol,
-                                            \stored_vcol, 'end', &sw)
+                                            \stored_vcol, 'end', shiftwidth())
         if ret | return res | endif
 
       " case EXPR of BRANCHES end
@@ -848,11 +848,11 @@ function! s:ErlangCalcIndent2(lnum, stack)
         elseif stack == ['->']
           call s:Log('    LTI is in a branch after ' .
                     \'"of/receive/after/if/catch" -> return')
-          return stored_vcol + &sw
+          return stored_vcol + shiftwidth()
         elseif stack == ['when']
           call s:Log('    LTI is in a guard after ' .
                     \'"of/receive/after/if/catch" -> return')
-          return stored_vcol + &sw
+          return stored_vcol + shiftwidth()
         else
           return s:UnexpectedToken(token, stack)
         endif
@@ -888,7 +888,7 @@ function! s:ErlangCalcIndent2(lnum, stack)
           if empty(stack)
             call s:Log('    LTI is in a condition; matching ' .
                       \'"case/if/try/receive" found')
-            let stored_vcol = curr_vcol + &sw
+            let stored_vcol = curr_vcol + shiftwidth()
           elseif stack[0] ==# 'align_to_begin_element'
             call s:Pop(stack)
             let stored_vcol = curr_vcol
@@ -897,23 +897,23 @@ function! s:ErlangCalcIndent2(lnum, stack)
                       \'"case/if/try/receive" found')
             call s:Pop(stack)
             call s:Pop(stack)
-            let stored_vcol = curr_vcol + &sw
+            let stored_vcol = curr_vcol + shiftwidth()
           elseif stack[0] ==# '->'
             call s:Log('    LTI is in a branch; matching ' .
                       \'"case/if/try/receive" found')
             call s:Pop(stack)
-            let stored_vcol = curr_vcol + 2 * &sw
+            let stored_vcol = curr_vcol + 2 * shiftwidth()
           elseif stack[0] ==# 'when'
             call s:Log('    LTI is in a guard; matching ' .
                       \'"case/if/try/receive" found')
             call s:Pop(stack)
-            let stored_vcol = curr_vcol + 2 * &sw + 2
+            let stored_vcol = curr_vcol + 2 * shiftwidth() + 2
           endif
 
         endif
 
         let [ret, res] = s:BeginElementFound(stack, token, curr_vcol,
-                                            \stored_vcol, 'end', &sw)
+                                            \stored_vcol, 'end', shiftwidth())
         if ret | return res | endif
 
       elseif token ==# 'fun'
@@ -930,7 +930,7 @@ function! s:ErlangCalcIndent2(lnum, stack)
           " stack = ['when']  =>  LTI is in a guard
           if empty(stack)
             call s:Log('    LTI is in a condition; matching "fun" found')
-            let stored_vcol = curr_vcol + &sw
+            let stored_vcol = curr_vcol + shiftwidth()
           elseif len(stack) > 1 && stack[0] ==# '->' && stack[1] ==# ';'
             call s:Log('    LTI is in a condition; matching "fun" found')
             call s:Pop(stack)
@@ -938,15 +938,15 @@ function! s:ErlangCalcIndent2(lnum, stack)
           elseif stack[0] ==# '->'
             call s:Log('    LTI is in a branch; matching "fun" found')
             call s:Pop(stack)
-            let stored_vcol = curr_vcol + 2 * &sw
+            let stored_vcol = curr_vcol + 2 * shiftwidth()
           elseif stack[0] ==# 'when'
             call s:Log('    LTI is in a guard; matching "fun" found')
             call s:Pop(stack)
-            let stored_vcol = curr_vcol + 2 * &sw + 2
+            let stored_vcol = curr_vcol + 2 * shiftwidth() + 2
           endif
 
           let [ret, res] = s:BeginElementFound(stack, token, curr_vcol,
-                                              \stored_vcol, 'end', &sw)
+                                              \stored_vcol, 'end', shiftwidth())
           if ret | return res | endif
         else
           " Pass: we have a function reference (e.g. "fun f/0")
@@ -1220,7 +1220,7 @@ function! s:ErlangCalcIndent2(lnum, stack)
             "   when A,
             "        LTI
             let [ret, res] = s:BeginElementFoundIfEmpty(stack, token, curr_vcol,
-                                                       \stored_vcol, &sw)
+                                                       \stored_vcol, shiftwidth())
             if ret | return res | endif
           else
             " Example:
@@ -1252,7 +1252,7 @@ function! s:ErlangCalcIndent2(lnum, stack)
           " If LTI is between an 'after' and the corresponding
           " 'end', then let's return
           let [ret, res] = s:BeginElementFoundIfEmpty(stack, token, curr_vcol,
-                                                     \stored_vcol, &sw)
+                                                     \stored_vcol, shiftwidth())
           if ret | return res | endif
         endif
 

runtime/indent/eruby.vim

@@ -47,11 +47,7 @@ set cpo&vim
 
 function! GetErubyIndent(...)
   " The value of a single shift-width
-  if exists('*shiftwidth')
+  let sw = shiftwidth()
-    let sw = shiftwidth()
-  else
-    let sw = &sw
-  endif
 
   if a:0 && a:1 == '.'
     let v:lnum = line('.')

runtime/indent/falcon.vim

@@ -339,7 +339,7 @@ function FalconGetIndent(...)
 
     " If the previous line ended with a block opening, add a level of indent.
     if s:Match(lnum, s:block_regex)
-	return indent(s:GetMSL(lnum)) + &sw
+	return indent(s:GetMSL(lnum)) + shiftwidth()
     endif
 
     " If it contained hanging closing brackets, find the rightmost one, find its
@@ -350,20 +350,20 @@ function FalconGetIndent(...)
 	if opening.pos != -1
 	    if opening.type == '(' && searchpair('(', '', ')', 'bW', s:skip_expr) > 0
 		if col('.') + 1 == col('$')
-		    return ind + &sw
+		    return ind + shiftwidth()
 		else
 		    return virtcol('.')
 		endif
 	    else
 		let nonspace = matchend(line, '\S', opening.pos + 1) - 1
-		return nonspace > 0 ? nonspace : ind + &sw
+		return nonspace > 0 ? nonspace : ind + shiftwidth()
 	    endif
 	elseif closing.pos != -1
 	    call cursor(lnum, closing.pos + 1)
 	    normal! %
 
 	    if s:Match(line('.'), s:falcon_indent_keywords)
-		return indent('.') + &sw
+		return indent('.') + shiftwidth()
 	    else
 		return indent('.')
 	    endif
@@ -392,7 +392,7 @@ function FalconGetIndent(...)
     let col = s:Match(lnum, s:falcon_indent_keywords)
     if col > 0
 	call cursor(lnum, col)
-	let ind = virtcol('.') - 1 + &sw
+	let ind = virtcol('.') - 1 + shiftwidth()
 	" TODO: make this better (we need to count them) (or, if a searchpair
 	" fails, we know that something is lacking an end and thus we indent a
 	" level
@@ -422,9 +422,9 @@ function FalconGetIndent(...)
     " TODO: this does not take into account contrived things such as
     " module Foo; class Bar; end
     if s:Match(lnum, s:falcon_indent_keywords)
-	let ind = msl_ind + &sw
+	let ind = msl_ind + shiftwidth()
 	if s:Match(lnum, s:end_end_regex)
-	    let ind = ind - &sw
+	    let ind = ind - shiftwidth()
 	endif
 	return ind
     endif
@@ -433,7 +433,7 @@ function FalconGetIndent(...)
     " closing bracket, indent one extra level.
     if s:Match(lnum, s:non_bracket_continuation_regex) && !s:Match(lnum, '^\s*\([\])}]\|end\)')
 	if lnum == p_lnum
-	    let ind = msl_ind + &sw
+	    let ind = msl_ind + shiftwidth()
 	else
 	    let ind = msl_ind
 	endif

runtime/indent/gitconfig.vim

@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
 " Vim indent file
 " Language:	git config file
 " Maintainer:	Tim Pope <vimNOSPAM@tpope.org>
-" Last Change:	2016 Aug 29
+" Last Change:	2017 Jun 13
 
 if exists("b:did_indent")
   finish
@@ -20,7 +20,7 @@ if exists("*GetGitconfigIndent")
 endif
 
 function! GetGitconfigIndent()
-  let sw    = exists('*shiftwidth') ? shiftwidth() : &sw
+  let sw    = shiftwidth()
   let line  = getline(prevnonblank(v:lnum-1))
   let cline = getline(v:lnum)
   if line =~  '\\\@<!\%(\\\\\)*\\$'

runtime/indent/gitolite.vim

@@ -2,7 +2,7 @@
 " Language:	gitolite configuration
 " URL:		https://github.com/tmatilai/gitolite.vim
 " Maintainer:	Teemu Matilainen <teemu.matilainen@iki.fi>
-" Last Change:	2011-12-24
+" Last Change:	2017 Jun 13
 
 if exists("b:did_indent")
   finish
@@ -27,11 +27,11 @@ function! GetGitoliteIndent()
   let cline = getline(v:lnum)
 
   if cline =~ '^\s*\(C\|R\|RW\|RW+\|RWC\|RW+C\|RWD\|RW+D\|RWCD\|RW+CD\|-\)[ \t=]'
-    return &sw
+    return shiftwidth()
   elseif cline =~ '^\s*config\s'
-    return &sw
+    return shiftwidth()
   elseif pline =~ '^\s*repo\s' && cline =~ '^\s*\(#.*\)\?$'
-    return &sw
+    return shiftwidth()
   elseif cline =~ '^\s*#'
     return indent(prevln)
   elseif cline =~ '^\s*$'

runtime/indent/go.vim

@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
 " Vim indent file
 " Language:	Go
 " Maintainer:	David Barnett (https://github.com/google/vim-ft-go)
-" Last Change:	2014 Aug 16
+" Last Change:	2017 Jun 13
 "
 " TODO:
 " - function invocations split across lines
@@ -23,18 +23,6 @@ if exists('*GoIndent')
   finish
 endif
 
-" The shiftwidth() function is relatively new.
-" Don't require it to exist.
-if exists('*shiftwidth')
-  function s:sw() abort
-    return shiftwidth()
-  endfunction
-else
-  function s:sw() abort
-    return &shiftwidth
-  endfunction
-endif
-
 function! GoIndent(lnum)
   let l:prevlnum = prevnonblank(a:lnum-1)
   if l:prevlnum == 0
@@ -51,17 +39,17 @@ function! GoIndent(lnum)
 
   if l:prevl =~ '[({]\s*$'
     " previous line opened a block
-    let l:ind += s:sw()
+    let l:ind += shiftwidth()
   endif
   if l:prevl =~# '^\s*\(case .*\|default\):$'
     " previous line is part of a switch statement
-    let l:ind += s:sw()
+    let l:ind += shiftwidth()
   endif
   " TODO: handle if the previous line is a label.
 
   if l:thisl =~ '^\s*[)}]'
     " this line closed a block
-    let l:ind -= s:sw()
+    let l:ind -= shiftwidth()
   endif
 
   " Colons are tricky.
@@ -69,7 +57,7 @@ function! GoIndent(lnum)
   " We ignore trying to deal with jump labels because (a) they're rare, and
   " (b) they're hard to disambiguate from a composite literal key.
   if l:thisl =~# '^\s*\(case .*\|default\):$'
-    let l:ind -= s:sw()
+    let l:ind -= shiftwidth()
   endif
 
   return l:ind

runtime/indent/haml.vim

@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
 " Vim indent file
 " Language:	Haml
 " Maintainer:	Tim Pope <vimNOSPAM@tpope.org>
-" Last Change:	2016 Aug 29
+" Last Change:	2017 Jun 13
 
 if exists("b:did_indent")
   finish
@@ -37,7 +37,7 @@ function! GetHamlIndent()
   let line = substitute(line,'^\s\+','','')
   let indent = indent(lnum)
   let cindent = indent(v:lnum)
-  let sw = exists('*shiftwidth') ? shiftwidth() : &sw
+  let sw = shiftwidth()
   if cline =~# '\v^-\s*%(elsif|else|when)>'
     let indent = cindent < indent ? cindent : indent - sw
   endif

runtime/indent/hamster.vim

@@ -27,13 +27,13 @@ function HamGetIndent(lnum)
   " Add a shiftwidth to statements following if,  else, elseif,
   " case, select, default, do, until, while, for, start
   if prevline =~? '^\s*\<\(if\|else\%(if\)\?\|for\|repeat\|do\|while\|sub\)\>' 
-    let ind = ind + &sw
+    let ind = ind + shiftwidth()
   endif
 
   " Subtract a shiftwidth from else, elseif, end(if|while|for), until
   let line = getline(v:lnum)
   if line =~? '^\s*\(else\|elseif\|loop\|until\|end\%(if\|while\|for\|sub\)\)\>'
-    let ind = ind - &sw
+    let ind = ind - shiftwidth()
   endif
 
   return ind

runtime/indent/hog.vim

@@ -47,7 +47,7 @@ function GetHogIndent()
     " Continuation of a line that wasn't indented
     let prevline = getline(prevlnum)
     if prevline =~ '^\k\+.*\\\s*$'
-        return &sw 
+        return shiftwidth() 
     endif
 
     " Continuation of a line that was indented
@@ -58,13 +58,13 @@ function GetHogIndent()
     " Indent the next line if previous line contained a start of a block
     " definition ('{' or '(').
     if prevline =~ '^\k\+[^#]*{}\@!\s*$' " TODO || prevline =~ '^\k\+[^#]*()\@!\s*$'
-        return &sw
+        return shiftwidth()
     endif
 
     " Match inside of a block
     if s:IsInBlock(v:lnum)
         if prevline =~ "^\k\+.*$"
-            return &sw
+            return shiftwidth()
         else
             return indent(prevlnum)
         endif

runtime/indent/html.vim

@@ -2,7 +2,7 @@
 " Header: "{{{
 " Maintainer:	Bram Moolenaar
 " Original Author: Andy Wokula <anwoku@yahoo.de>
-" Last Change:	2017 Jan 17
+" Last Change:	2017 Jun 13
 " Version:	1.0
 " Description:	HTML indent script with cached state for faster indenting on a
 "		range of lines.
@@ -51,15 +51,6 @@ if exists("*HtmlIndent") && !exists('g:force_reload_html')
   finish
 endif
 
-" shiftwidth() exists since patch 7.3.694
-if exists('*shiftwidth')
-  let s:ShiftWidth = function('shiftwidth')
-else
-  func! s:ShiftWidth()
-    return &shiftwidth
-  endfunc
-endif
-
 " Allow for line continuation below.
 let s:cpo_save = &cpo
 set cpo-=C
@@ -123,7 +114,7 @@ func! HtmlIndent_CheckUserSettings()
 
   let indone = {"zero": 0
               \,"auto": "indent(prevnonblank(v:lnum-1))"
-              \,"inc": "b:hi_indent.blocktagind + s:ShiftWidth()"}
+              \,"inc": "b:hi_indent.blocktagind + shiftwidth()"}
 
   let script1 = ''
   if exists("b:html_indent_script1")
@@ -358,7 +349,7 @@ func! s:CheckBlockTag(blocktag, ind)
     endif
     let b:hi_newstate.blocklnr = v:lnum
     " save allover indent for the endtag
-    let b:hi_newstate.blocktagind = b:hi_indent.baseindent + (s:nextrel + s:curind) * s:ShiftWidth()
+    let b:hi_newstate.blocktagind = b:hi_indent.baseindent + (s:nextrel + s:curind) * shiftwidth()
     if a:ind == 3
       return "SCRIPT"    " all except this must be lowercase
       " line is to be checked again for the type attribute
@@ -480,7 +471,7 @@ func! s:FreshState(lnum)
       let state.blocklnr = stopline
       " check preceding tags in the line:
       call s:CountITags(tagline[: stopcol-2])
-      let state.blocktagind = indent(stopline) + (s:curind + s:nextrel) * s:ShiftWidth()
+      let state.blocktagind = indent(stopline) + (s:curind + s:nextrel) * shiftwidth()
       return state
     elseif stopline == state.lnum
       " handle special case: previous line (= state.lnum) contains a
@@ -490,7 +481,7 @@ func! s:FreshState(lnum)
       if !swendtag
         let [bline, bcol] = searchpos('<'.blocktag[1:].'\>', "bnW")
         call s:CountITags(tolower(getline(bline)[: bcol-2]))
-        let state.baseindent = indent(bline) + (s:curind + s:nextrel) * s:ShiftWidth()
+        let state.baseindent = indent(bline) + (s:curind + s:nextrel) * shiftwidth()
         return state
       endif
     endif
@@ -511,7 +502,7 @@ func! s:FreshState(lnum)
     if found == 2
       let state.baseindent = b:hi_indent.baseindent
     endif
-    let state.blocktagind = indent(comlnum) + (s:curind + s:nextrel) * s:ShiftWidth()
+    let state.blocktagind = indent(comlnum) + (s:curind + s:nextrel) * shiftwidth()
     return state
   endif
 
@@ -530,7 +521,7 @@ func! s:FreshState(lnum)
       let text = tolower(getline(comlnum)[: comcol-2])
     endif
     call s:CountITags(text)
-    let state.baseindent = indent(comlnum) + (s:curind + s:nextrel) * s:ShiftWidth()
+    let state.baseindent = indent(comlnum) + (s:curind + s:nextrel) * shiftwidth()
     " TODO check tags that follow "-->"
     return state
   endif
@@ -550,9 +541,9 @@ func! s:FreshState(lnum)
         let text = getline(start_lnum)
         let swendtag = match(text, '^\s*</') >= 0
         call s:CountITags(text[: col('.') - 2])
-        let state.baseindent += s:nextrel * s:ShiftWidth()
+        let state.baseindent += s:nextrel * shiftwidth()
         if !swendtag
-          let state.baseindent += s:curind * s:ShiftWidth()
+          let state.baseindent += s:curind * shiftwidth()
         endif
       endif
       return state
@@ -565,9 +556,9 @@ func! s:FreshState(lnum)
   let text = getline(state.lnum)
   let swendtag = match(text, '^\s*</') >= 0
   call s:CountITags(tolower(text))
-  let state.baseindent = indent(state.lnum) + s:nextrel * s:ShiftWidth()
+  let state.baseindent = indent(state.lnum) + s:nextrel * shiftwidth()
   if !swendtag
-    let state.baseindent += s:curind * s:ShiftWidth()
+    let state.baseindent += s:curind * shiftwidth()
   endif
   return state
 endfunc "}}}
@@ -646,7 +637,7 @@ func! s:CSSIndent()
 
   " add indent after {
   let brace_counts = HtmlIndent_CountBraces(prev_lnum)
-  let extra = brace_counts.c_open * s:ShiftWidth()
+  let extra = brace_counts.c_open * shiftwidth()
 
   let prev_text = getline(prev_lnum)
   let below_end_brace = prev_text =~ '}\s*$'
@@ -663,7 +654,7 @@ func! s:CSSIndent()
       " if the current line is not a comment or starts with @ (used by template
       " systems) reduce indent if previous line is a continuation line
       if !prev_hasfield && !prev_special
-        let extra = -s:ShiftWidth()
+        let extra = -shiftwidth()
       endif
     else
       let cur_hasfield = curtext =~ '^\s*[a-zA-Z0-9-]\+:'
@@ -671,14 +662,14 @@ func! s:CSSIndent()
       if !cur_hasfield && (prev_hasfield || prev_unfinished)
         " Continuation line has extra indent if the previous line was not a
         " continuation line.
-        let extra = s:ShiftWidth()
+        let extra = shiftwidth()
         " Align with @if
         if prev_text =~ '^\s*@if '
           let extra = 4
         endif
       elseif cur_hasfield && !prev_hasfield && !prev_special
         " less indent below a continuation line
-        let extra = -s:ShiftWidth()
+        let extra = -shiftwidth()
       endif
     endif
   endif
@@ -699,10 +690,10 @@ func! s:CSSIndent()
     if special
       " do not reduce indent below @{ ... }
       if extra < 0
-        let extra += s:ShiftWidth()
+        let extra += shiftwidth()
       endif
     else
-      let extra -= (brace_counts.c_close - (prev_text =~ '^\s*}')) * s:ShiftWidth()
+      let extra -= (brace_counts.c_close - (prev_text =~ '^\s*}')) * shiftwidth()
     endif
   endif
 
@@ -710,10 +701,10 @@ func! s:CSSIndent()
   if extra == 0
     if brace_counts.p_open > brace_counts.p_close
       " previous line has more ( than ): add a shiftwidth
-      let extra = s:ShiftWidth()
+      let extra = shiftwidth()
     elseif brace_counts.p_open < brace_counts.p_close
       " previous line has more ) than (: subtract a shiftwidth
-      let extra = -s:ShiftWidth()
+      let extra = -shiftwidth()
     endif
   endif
 
@@ -816,7 +807,7 @@ func! s:Alien5()
   let idx = match(prevtext, '^\s*\zs<!--')
   if idx >= 0
     " just below comment start, add a shiftwidth
-    return idx + s:ShiftWidth()
+    return idx + shiftwidth()
   endif
 
   " Some files add 4 spaces just below a TODO line.  It's difficult to detect
@@ -837,7 +828,7 @@ func! s:Alien6()
       return indent(lnum)
     endif
   endif
-  return b:hi_indent.baseindent + s:ShiftWidth()
+  return b:hi_indent.baseindent + shiftwidth()
 endfunc "}}}
 
 " When the "lnum" line ends in ">" find the line containing the matching "<".
@@ -947,7 +938,7 @@ func! HtmlIndent()
   endif
 
   let curtext = tolower(getline(v:lnum))
-  let indentunit = s:ShiftWidth()
+  let indentunit = shiftwidth()
 
   let b:hi_newstate = {}
   let b:hi_newstate.lnum = v:lnum
@@ -1030,9 +1021,9 @@ func! HtmlIndent()
         if col('.') > 2
           let swendtag = match(text, '^\s*</') >= 0
           call s:CountITags(text[: col('.') - 2])
-          let indent += s:nextrel * s:ShiftWidth()
+          let indent += s:nextrel * shiftwidth()
           if !swendtag
-            let indent += s:curind * s:ShiftWidth()
+            let indent += s:curind * shiftwidth()
           endif
         endif
       else

runtime/indent/idlang.vim

@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 " IDL (Interactive Data Language) indent file.
 " Language: IDL (ft=idlang)
-" Last change:	2012 May 18
+" Last change:	2017 Jun 13
 " Maintainer: Aleksandar Jelenak <ajelenak AT yahoo.com>
 
 " Only load this indent file when no other was loaded.
@@ -34,25 +34,25 @@ function GetIdlangIndent(lnum)
    " Indenting of continued lines.
    if getline(pnum) =~ '\$\s*\(;.*\)\=$'
       if getline(pnum2) !~ '\$\s*\(;.*\)\=$'
-	 let curind = curind+&sw
+	 let curind = curind+shiftwidth()
       endif
    else
       if getline(pnum2) =~ '\$\s*\(;.*\)\=$'
-	 let curind = curind-&sw
+	 let curind = curind-shiftwidth()
       endif
    endif
 
    " Indenting blocks of statements.
    if getline(v:lnum) =~? '^\s*\(endif\|endelse\|endwhile\|endfor\|endrep\)\>'
       if getline(pnum) =~? 'begin\>'
-      elseif indent(v:lnum) > curind-&sw
+      elseif indent(v:lnum) > curind-shiftwidth()
-	 let curind = curind-&sw
+	 let curind = curind-shiftwidth()
       else
 	 return -1
       endif
    elseif getline(pnum) =~? 'begin\>'
-      if indent(v:lnum) < curind+&sw
+      if indent(v:lnum) < curind+shiftwidth()
-	 let curind = curind+&sw
+	 let curind = curind+shiftwidth()
       else
 	 return -1
       endif

runtime/indent/ishd.vim

@@ -50,17 +50,17 @@ fun! GetIshdIndent(lnum)
 
     " Add
     if previous_line =~ '^\s*\<\(function\|begin\|switch\|case\|default\|if.\{-}then\|else\|elseif\|while\|repeat\)\>'
-	let ind = ind + &sw
+	let ind = ind + shiftwidth()
     endif
 
     " Subtract
     if this_line =~ '^\s*\<endswitch\>'
-	let ind = ind - 2 * &sw
+	let ind = ind - 2 * shiftwidth()
     elseif this_line =~ '^\s*\<\(begin\|end\|endif\|endwhile\|else\|elseif\|until\)\>'
-	let ind = ind - &sw
+	let ind = ind - shiftwidth()
     elseif this_line =~ '^\s*\<\(case\|default\)\>'
 	if previous_line !~ '^\s*\<switch\>'
-	    let ind = ind - &sw
+	    let ind = ind - shiftwidth()
 	endif
     endif
 

runtime/indent/javascript.vim

@@ -2,7 +2,7 @@
 " Language: Javascript
 " Maintainer: Chris Paul ( https://github.com/bounceme )
 " URL: https://github.com/pangloss/vim-javascript
-" Last Change: March 21, 2017
+" Last Change: September 18, 2017
 
 " Only load this indent file when no other was loaded.
 if exists('b:did_indent')
@@ -10,6 +10,10 @@ if exists('b:did_indent')
 endif
 let b:did_indent = 1
 
+" indent correctly if inside <script>
+" vim/vim@690afe1 for the switch from cindent
+let b:html_indent_script1 = 'inc'
+
 " Now, set up our indentation expression and keys that trigger it.
 setlocal indentexpr=GetJavascriptIndent()
 setlocal autoindent nolisp nosmartindent
@@ -21,6 +25,13 @@ setlocal indentkeys+=0],0)
 
 let b:undo_indent = 'setlocal indentexpr< smartindent< autoindent< indentkeys<'
 
+" Regex of syntax group names that are or delimit string or are comments.
+let b:syng_strcom = get(b:,'syng_strcom','string\|comment\|regex\|special\|doc\|template\%(braces\)\@!')
+let b:syng_str = get(b:,'syng_str','string\|template\|special')
+" template strings may want to be excluded when editing graphql:
+" au! Filetype javascript let b:syng_str = '^\%(.*template\)\@!.*string\|special'
+" au! Filetype javascript let b:syng_strcom = '^\%(.*template\)\@!.*string\|comment\|regex\|special\|doc'
+
 " Only define the function once.
 if exists('*GetJavascriptIndent')
   finish
@@ -36,7 +47,7 @@ if exists('*shiftwidth')
   endfunction
 else
   function s:sw()
-    return &l:shiftwidth == 0 ? &l:tabstop : &l:shiftwidth
+    return &l:shiftwidth ? &l:shiftwidth : &l:tabstop
   endfunction
 endif
 
@@ -44,271 +55,301 @@ endif
 " matches before pos.
 let s:z = has('patch-7.4.984') ? 'z' : ''
 
+" Expression used to check whether we should skip a match with searchpair().
+let s:skip_expr = "s:SynAt(line('.'),col('.')) =~? b:syng_strcom"
+let s:in_comm = s:skip_expr[:-14] . "'comment\\|doc'"
+
+let s:rel = has('reltime')
 " searchpair() wrapper
-if has('reltime')
+if s:rel
-  function s:GetPair(start,end,flags,skip,time,...)
+  function s:GetPair(start,end,flags,skip)
-    return searchpair('\m'.a:start,'','\m'.a:end,a:flags,a:skip,max([prevnonblank(v:lnum) - 2000,0] + a:000),a:time)
+    return searchpair('\m'.a:start,'','\m'.a:end,a:flags,a:skip,s:l1,a:skip ==# 's:SkipFunc()' ? 2000 : 200)
   endfunction
 else
-  function s:GetPair(start,end,flags,skip,...)
+  function s:GetPair(start,end,flags,skip)
-    return searchpair('\m'.a:start,'','\m'.a:end,a:flags,a:skip,max([prevnonblank(v:lnum) - 1000,get(a:000,1)]))
+    return searchpair('\m'.a:start,'','\m'.a:end,a:flags,a:skip,s:l1)
   endfunction
 endif
 
-" Regex of syntax group names that are or delimit string or are comments.
+function s:SynAt(l,c)
-let s:syng_strcom = 'string\|comment\|regex\|special\|doc\|template\%(braces\)\@!'
+  let byte = line2byte(a:l) + a:c - 1
-let s:syng_str = 'string\|template\|special'
+  let pos = index(s:synid_cache[0], byte)
-let s:syng_com = 'comment\|doc'
+  if pos == -1
-" Expression used to check whether we should skip a match with searchpair().
+    let s:synid_cache[:] += [[byte], [synIDattr(synID(a:l, a:c, 0), 'name')]]
-let s:skip_expr = "synIDattr(synID(line('.'),col('.'),0),'name') =~? '".s:syng_strcom."'"
-
-function s:parse_cino(f) abort
-  return float2nr(eval(substitute(substitute(join(split(
-        \ matchstr(&cino,'.*'.a:f.'\zs[^,]*'), 's',1), '*'.s:W)
-        \ , '^-\=\zs\*','',''), '^-\=\zs\.','0.','')))
-endfunction
-
-function s:skip_func()
-  if getline('.') =~ '\%<'.col('.').'c\/.\{-}\/\|\%>'.col('.').'c[''"]\|\\$'
-    return eval(s:skip_expr)
-  elseif s:checkIn || search('\m`\|\${\|\*\/','nW'.s:z,s:looksyn)
-    let s:checkIn = eval(s:skip_expr)
   endif
-  let s:looksyn = line('.')
+  return s:synid_cache[1][pos]
-  return s:checkIn
 endfunction
 
-function s:alternatePair(stop)
+function s:ParseCino(f)
-  let pos = getpos('.')[1:2]
+  let [divider, n, cstr] = [0] + matchlist(&cino,
-  let pat = '[][(){};]'
+        \ '\%(.*,\)\=\%(\%d'.char2nr(a:f).'\(-\)\=\([.s0-9]*\)\)\=')[1:2]
-  while search('\m'.pat,'bW',a:stop)
+  for c in split(cstr,'\zs')
-    if s:skip_func() | continue | endif
+    if c == '.' && !divider
-    let idx = stridx('])};',s:looking_at())
+      let divider = 1
-    if idx is 3 | let pat = '[{}()]' | continue | endif
+    elseif c ==# 's'
-    if idx + 1
+      if n !~ '\d'
-      if s:GetPair(['\[','(','{'][idx], '])}'[idx],'bW','s:skip_func()',2000,a:stop) <= 0
+        return n . s:sw() + 0
+      endif
+      let n = str2nr(n) * s:sw()
+      break
+    else
+      let [n, divider] .= [c, 0]
+    endif
+  endfor
+  return str2nr(n) / max([str2nr(divider),1])
+endfunction
+
+" Optimized {skip} expr, only callable from the search loop which
+" GetJavascriptIndent does to find the containing [[{(] (side-effects)
+function s:SkipFunc()
+  if s:top_col == 1
+    throw 'out of bounds'
+  endif
+  let s:top_col = 0
+  if s:check_in
+    if eval(s:skip_expr)
+      return 1
+    endif
+    let s:check_in = 0
+  elseif getline('.') =~ '\%<'.col('.').'c\/.\{-}\/\|\%>'.col('.').'c[''"]\|\\$'
+    if eval(s:skip_expr)
+      let s:looksyn = a:firstline
+      return 1
+    endif
+  elseif search('\m`\|\${\|\*\/','nW'.s:z,s:looksyn) && eval(s:skip_expr)
+    let s:check_in = 1
+    return 1
+  endif
+  let [s:looksyn, s:top_col] = getpos('.')[1:2]
+endfunction
+
+function s:AlternatePair()
+  let [pat, l:for] = ['[][(){};]', 2]
+  while s:SearchLoop(pat,'bW','s:SkipFunc()')
+    if s:LookingAt() == ';'
+      if !l:for
+        if s:GetPair('{','}','bW','s:SkipFunc()')
+          return
+        endif
         break
+      else
+        let [pat, l:for] = ['[{}();]', l:for - 1]
       endif
     else
-      return
+      let idx = stridx('])}',s:LookingAt())
+      if idx == -1
+        return
+      elseif !s:GetPair(['\[','(','{'][idx],'])}'[idx],'bW','s:SkipFunc()')
+        break
+      endif
     endif
   endwhile
-  call call('cursor',pos)
+  throw 'out of bounds'
 endfunction
 
-function s:save_pos(f,...)
+function s:Nat(int)
-  let l:pos = getpos('.')[1:2]
+  return a:int * (a:int > 0)
-  let ret = call(a:f,a:000)
-  call call('cursor',l:pos)
-  return ret
 endfunction
 
-function s:syn_at(l,c)
+function s:LookingAt()
-  return synIDattr(synID(a:l,a:c,0),'name')
-endfunction
-
-function s:looking_at()
   return getline('.')[col('.')-1]
 endfunction
 
-function s:token()
+function s:Token()
-  return s:looking_at() =~ '\k' ? expand('<cword>') : s:looking_at()
+  return s:LookingAt() =~ '\k' ? expand('<cword>') : s:LookingAt()
 endfunction
 
-function s:previous_token()
+function s:PreviousToken()
-  let l:pos = getpos('.')[1:2]
+  let l:col = col('.')
-  if search('\m\k\{1,}\zs\k\|\S','bW')
+  if search('\m\k\{1,}\|\S','ebW')
-    if (getline('.')[col('.')-2:col('.')-1] == '*/' || line('.') != l:pos[0] &&
+    if search('\m\*\%#\/\|\/\/\%<'.a:firstline.'l','nbW',line('.')) && eval(s:in_comm)
-          \ getline('.') =~ '\%<'.col('.').'c\/\/') && s:syn_at(line('.'),col('.')) =~? s:syng_com
+      if s:SearchLoop('\S\ze\_s*\/[/*]','bW',s:in_comm)
-      while search('\m\S\ze\_s*\/[/*]','bW')
+        return s:Token()
-        if s:syn_at(line('.'),col('.')) !~? s:syng_com
+      endif
-          return s:token()
+      call cursor(a:firstline, l:col)
-        endif
-      endwhile
     else
-      return s:token()
+      return s:Token()
     endif
   endif
-  call call('cursor',l:pos)
   return ''
 endfunction
 
-function s:expr_col()
+function s:Pure(f,...)
-  if getline('.')[col('.')-2] == ':'
+  return eval("[call(a:f,a:000),cursor(a:firstline,".col('.').")][0]")
-    return 1
+endfunction
-  endif
+
+function s:SearchLoop(pat,flags,expr)
+  return s:GetPair(a:pat,'\_$.',a:flags,a:expr)
+endfunction
+
+function s:ExprCol()
   let bal = 0
-  while search('\m[{}?:;]','bW')
+  while s:SearchLoop('[{}?]\|\_[^:]\zs::\@!','bW',s:skip_expr)
-    if eval(s:skip_expr) | continue | endif
+    if s:LookingAt() == ':'
-    " switch (looking_at())
+      let bal -= 1
-    exe {   '}': "if s:GetPair('{','}','bW',s:skip_expr,200) <= 0 | return | endif",
+    elseif s:LookingAt() == '?'
-          \ ';': "return",
+      let bal += 1
-          \ '{': "return getpos('.')[1:2] != b:js_cache[1:] && !s:IsBlock()",
+      if bal == 1
-          \ ':': "let bal -= getline('.')[max([col('.')-2,0]):col('.')] !~ '::'",
+        break
-          \ '?': "let bal += 1 | if bal > 0 | return 1 | endif" }[s:looking_at()]
+      endif
+    elseif s:LookingAt() == '{'
+      let bal = !s:IsBlock()
+      break
+    elseif !s:GetPair('{','}','bW',s:skip_expr)
+      break
+    endif
   endwhile
+  return s:Nat(bal)
 endfunction
 
 " configurable regexes that define continuation lines, not including (, {, or [.
 let s:opfirst = '^' . get(g:,'javascript_opfirst',
-      \ '\C\%([<>=,?^%|*/&]\|\([-.:+]\)\1\@!\|!=\|in\%(stanceof\)\=\>\)')
+      \ '\C\%([<>=,.?^%|/&]\|\([-:+]\)\1\@!\|\*\+\|!=\|in\%(stanceof\)\=\>\)')
 let s:continuation = get(g:,'javascript_continuation',
-      \ '\C\%([-+<>=,.~!?/*^%|&:]\|\<\%(typeof\|new\|delete\|void\|in\|instanceof\|await\)\)') . '$'
+      \ '\C\%([<=,.~!?/*^%|&:]\|+\@<!+\|-\@<!-\|=\@<!>\|\<\%(typeof\|new\|delete\|void\|in\|instanceof\|await\)\)') . '$'
 
-function s:continues(ln,con)
+function s:Continues(ln,con)
-  if !cursor(a:ln, match(' '.a:con,s:continuation))
+  let tok = matchstr(a:con[-15:],s:continuation)
-    let teol = s:looking_at()
+  if tok =~ '[a-z:]'
-    if teol == '/'
+    call cursor(a:ln, len(a:con))
-      return s:syn_at(line('.'),col('.')) !~? 'regex'
+    return tok == ':' ? s:ExprCol() : s:PreviousToken() != '.'
-    elseif teol =~ '[-+>]'
+  elseif tok !~ '[/>]'
-      return getline('.')[col('.')-2] != tr(teol,'>','=')
+    return tok isnot ''
-    elseif teol =~ '\l'
-      return s:previous_token() != '.'
-    elseif teol == ':'
-      return s:expr_col()
-    endif
-    return 1
   endif
-endfunction
+  return s:SynAt(a:ln, len(a:con)) !~? (tok == '>' ? 'jsflow\|^html' : 'regex')
-
-" get the line of code stripped of comments and move cursor to the last
-" non-comment char.
-function s:Trim(ln)
-  let pline = substitute(getline(a:ln),'\s*$','','')
-  let l:max = max([strridx(pline,'//'), strridx(pline,'/*')])
-  while l:max != -1 && s:syn_at(a:ln, strlen(pline)) =~? s:syng_com
-    let pline = pline[: l:max]
-    let l:max = max([strridx(pline,'//'), strridx(pline,'/*')])
-    let pline = substitute(pline[:-2],'\s*$','','')
-  endwhile
-  return pline is '' || cursor(a:ln,strlen(pline)) ? pline : pline
-endfunction
-
-" Find line above 'lnum' that isn't empty or in a comment
-function s:PrevCodeLine(lnum)
-  let [l:pos, l:n] = [getpos('.')[1:2], prevnonblank(a:lnum)]
-  while l:n
-    if getline(l:n) =~ '^\s*\/[/*]'
-      let l:n = prevnonblank(l:n-1)
-    elseif stridx(getline(l:n), '*/') + 1 && s:syn_at(l:n,1) =~? s:syng_com
-      call cursor(l:n,1)
-      keepjumps norm! [*
-      let l:n = search('\m\S','nbW')
-    else
-      break
-    endif
-  endwhile
-  call call('cursor',l:pos)
-  return l:n
 endfunction
 
 " Check if line 'lnum' has a balanced amount of parentheses.
 function s:Balanced(lnum)
-  let l:open = 0
+  let [l:open, l:line] = [0, getline(a:lnum)]
-  let l:line = getline(a:lnum)
+  let pos = match(l:line, '[][(){}]')
-  let pos = match(l:line, '[][(){}]', 0)
   while pos != -1
-    if s:syn_at(a:lnum,pos + 1) !~? s:syng_strcom
+    if s:SynAt(a:lnum,pos + 1) !~? b:syng_strcom
       let l:open += match(' ' . l:line[pos],'[[({]')
       if l:open < 0
         return
       endif
     endif
-    let pos = match(l:line, (l:open ?
+    let pos = match(l:line, !l:open ? '[][(){}]' : '()' =~ l:line[pos] ?
-          \ '['.escape(tr(l:line[pos],'({[]})',')}][{(').l:line[pos],']').']' :
+          \ '[()]' : '{}' =~ l:line[pos] ? '[{}]' : '[][]', pos + 1)
-          \ '[][(){}]'), pos + 1)
   endwhile
   return !l:open
 endfunction
 
-function s:OneScope(lnum)
+function s:OneScope()
-  let pline = s:Trim(a:lnum)
+  if s:LookingAt() == ')' && s:GetPair('(', ')', 'bW', s:skip_expr)
-  let kw = 'else do'
+    let tok = s:PreviousToken()
-  if pline[-1:] == ')' && s:GetPair('(', ')', 'bW', s:skip_expr, 100) > 0
+    return (count(split('for if let while with'),tok) ||
-    if s:previous_token() =~# '^\%(await\|each\)$'
+          \ tok =~# '^await$\|^each$' && s:PreviousToken() ==# 'for') &&
-      call s:previous_token()
+          \ s:Pure('s:PreviousToken') != '.' && !(tok == 'while' && s:DoWhile())
-      let kw = 'for'
+  elseif s:Token() =~# '^else$\|^do$'
-    else
+    return s:Pure('s:PreviousToken') != '.'
-      let kw = 'for if let while with'
-    endif
   endif
-  return pline[-2:] == '=>' || index(split(kw),s:token()) + 1 &&
+  return strpart(getline('.'),col('.')-2,2) == '=>'
-        \ s:save_pos('s:previous_token') != '.'
 endfunction
 
-" returns braceless levels started by 'i' and above lines * &sw. 'num' is the
+function s:DoWhile()
-" lineNr which encloses the entire context, 'cont' if whether line 'i' + 1 is
+  let cpos = searchpos('\m\<','cbW')
-" a continued expression, which could have started in a braceless context
+  if s:SearchLoop('\C[{}]\|\<\%(do\|while\)\>','bW',s:skip_expr)
-function s:iscontOne(i,num,cont)
+    if s:{s:LookingAt() == '}' && s:GetPair('{','}','bW',s:skip_expr) ?
-  let [l:i, l:num, bL] = [a:i, a:num + !a:num, 0]
+          \ 'Previous' : ''}Token() ==# 'do' && s:IsBlock()
-  let pind = a:num ? indent(l:num) + s:W : 0
+      return 1
-  let ind = indent(l:i) + (a:cont ? 0 : s:W)
+    endif
-  while l:i >= l:num && (ind > pind || l:i == l:num)
+    call call('cursor',cpos)
-    if indent(l:i) < ind && s:OneScope(l:i)
+  endif
-      let bL += s:W
+endfunction
-      let l:i = line('.')
+
-    elseif !a:cont || bL || ind < indent(a:i)
+" returns total offset from braceless contexts. 'num' is the lineNr which
+" encloses the entire context, 'cont' if whether a:firstline is a continued
+" expression, which could have started in a braceless context
+function s:IsContOne(num,cont)
+  let [l:num, b_l] = [a:num + !a:num, 0]
+  let pind = a:num ? indent(a:num) + s:sw() : 0
+  let ind = indent('.') + !a:cont
+  while line('.') > l:num && ind > pind || line('.') == l:num
+    if indent('.') < ind && s:OneScope()
+      let b_l += 1
+    elseif !a:cont || b_l || ind < indent(a:firstline)
+      break
+    else
+      call cursor(0,1)
+    endif
+    let ind = min([ind, indent('.')])
+    if s:PreviousToken() is ''
       break
     endif
-    let ind = min([ind, indent(l:i)])
-    let l:i = s:PrevCodeLine(l:i - 1)
   endwhile
-  return bL
+  return b_l
+endfunction
+
+function s:Class()
+  return (s:Token() ==# 'class' || s:PreviousToken() =~# '^class$\|^extends$') &&
+        \ s:PreviousToken() != '.'
+endfunction
+
+function s:IsSwitch()
+  return s:PreviousToken() !~ '[.*]' &&
+        \ (!s:GetPair('{','}','cbW',s:skip_expr) || s:IsBlock() && !s:Class())
 endfunction
 
 " https://github.com/sweet-js/sweet.js/wiki/design#give-lookbehind-to-the-reader
 function s:IsBlock()
-  if s:looking_at() == '{'
+  let tok = s:PreviousToken()
-    let l:n = line('.')
+  if join(s:stack) =~? 'xml\|jsx' && s:SynAt(line('.'),col('.')-1) =~? 'xml\|jsx'
-    let char = s:previous_token()
+    return tok != '{'
-    if match(s:stack,'\cxml\|jsx') + 1 && s:syn_at(line('.'),col('.')-1) =~? 'xml\|jsx'
+  elseif tok =~ '\k'
-      return char != '{'
+    if tok ==# 'type'
-    elseif char =~ '\k'
+      return s:Pure('eval',"s:PreviousToken() !~# '^\\%(im\\|ex\\)port$' || s:PreviousToken() == '.'")
-      if char ==# 'type'
+    elseif tok ==# 'of'
-        return s:previous_token() !~# '^\%(im\|ex\)port$'
+      return s:Pure('eval',"!s:GetPair('[[({]','[])}]','bW',s:skip_expr) || s:LookingAt() != '(' ||"
-      endif
+            \ ."s:{s:PreviousToken() ==# 'await' ? 'Previous' : ''}Token() !=# 'for' || s:PreviousToken() == '.'")
-      return index(split('return const let import export extends yield default delete var await void typeof throw case new of in instanceof')
-            \ ,char) < (line('.') != l:n) || s:save_pos('s:previous_token') == '.'
-    elseif char == '>'
-      return getline('.')[col('.')-2] == '=' || s:syn_at(line('.'),col('.')) =~? '^jsflow'
-    elseif char == ':'
-      return !s:save_pos('s:expr_col')
-    elseif char == '/'
-      return s:syn_at(line('.'),col('.')) =~? 'regex'
     endif
-    return char !~ '[=~!<*,?^%|&([]' &&
+    return index(split('return const let import export extends yield default delete var await void typeof throw case new in instanceof')
-          \ (char !~ '[-+]' || l:n != line('.') && getline('.')[col('.')-2] == char)
+          \ ,tok) < (line('.') != a:firstline) || s:Pure('s:PreviousToken') == '.'
+  elseif tok == '>'
+    return getline('.')[col('.')-2] == '=' || s:SynAt(line('.'),col('.')) =~? 'jsflow\|^html'
+  elseif tok == '*'
+    return s:Pure('s:PreviousToken') == ':'
+  elseif tok == ':'
+    return s:Pure('eval',"s:PreviousToken() =~ '^\\K\\k*$' && !s:ExprCol()")
+  elseif tok == '/'
+    return s:SynAt(line('.'),col('.')) =~? 'regex'
+  elseif tok !~ '[=~!<,.?^%|&([]'
+    return tok !~ '[-+]' || line('.') != a:firstline && getline('.')[col('.')-2] == tok
   endif
 endfunction
 
 function GetJavascriptIndent()
   let b:js_cache = get(b:,'js_cache',[0,0,0])
-  " Get the current line.
+  let s:synid_cache = [[],[]]
-  call cursor(v:lnum,1)
+  let l:line = getline(v:lnum)
-  let l:line = getline('.')
   " use synstack as it validates syn state and works in an empty line
-  let s:stack = map(synstack(v:lnum,1),"synIDattr(v:val,'name')")
+  let s:stack = [''] + map(synstack(v:lnum,1),"synIDattr(v:val,'name')")
-  let syns = get(s:stack,-1,'')
 
   " start with strings,comments,etc.
-  if syns =~? s:syng_com
+  if s:stack[-1] =~? 'comment\|doc'
     if l:line =~ '^\s*\*'
       return cindent(v:lnum)
     elseif l:line !~ '^\s*\/[/*]'
       return -1
     endif
-  elseif syns =~? s:syng_str
+  elseif s:stack[-1] =~? b:syng_str
     if b:js_cache[0] == v:lnum - 1 && s:Balanced(v:lnum-1)
       let b:js_cache[0] = v:lnum
     endif
     return -1
   endif
-  let l:lnum = s:PrevCodeLine(v:lnum - 1)
+
-  if !l:lnum
+  let s:l1 = max([0,prevnonblank(v:lnum) - (s:rel ? 2000 : 1000),
+        \ get(get(b:,'hi_indent',{}),'blocklnr')])
+  call cursor(v:lnum,1)
+  if s:PreviousToken() is ''
     return
   endif
+  let [l:lnum, pline] = [line('.'), getline('.')[:col('.')-1]]
 
   let l:line = substitute(l:line,'^\s*','','')
+  let l:line_raw = l:line
   if l:line[:1] == '/*'
     let l:line = substitute(l:line,'^\%(\/\*.\{-}\*\/\s*\)*','','')
   endif
@@ -317,60 +358,91 @@ function GetJavascriptIndent()
   endif
 
   " the containing paren, bracket, or curly. Many hacks for performance
+  call cursor(v:lnum,1)
   let idx = index([']',')','}'],l:line[0])
-  if b:js_cache[0] >= l:lnum && b:js_cache[0] < v:lnum &&
+  if b:js_cache[0] > l:lnum && b:js_cache[0] < v:lnum ||
-        \ (b:js_cache[0] > l:lnum || s:Balanced(l:lnum))
+        \ b:js_cache[0] == l:lnum && s:Balanced(l:lnum)
     call call('cursor',b:js_cache[1:])
   else
-    let [s:looksyn, s:checkIn, top] = [v:lnum - 1, 0, (!indent(l:lnum) &&
+    let [s:looksyn, s:top_col, s:check_in, s:l1] = [v:lnum - 1,0,0,
-          \ s:syn_at(l:lnum,1) !~? s:syng_str) * l:lnum]
+          \ max([s:l1, &smc ? search('\m^.\{'.&smc.',}','nbW',s:l1 + 1) + 1 : 0])]
-    if idx + 1
+    try
-      call s:GetPair(['\[','(','{'][idx],'])}'[idx],'bW','s:skip_func()',2000,top)
+      if idx != -1
-    elseif getline(v:lnum) !~ '^\S' && syns =~? 'block'
+        call s:GetPair(['\[','(','{'][idx],'])}'[idx],'bW','s:SkipFunc()')
-      call s:GetPair('{','}','bW','s:skip_func()',2000,top)
+      elseif getline(v:lnum) !~ '^\S' && s:stack[-1] =~? 'block\|^jsobject$'
-    else
+        call s:GetPair('{','}','bW','s:SkipFunc()')
-      call s:alternatePair(top)
+      else
-    endif
+        call s:AlternatePair()
+      endif
+    catch /^\Cout of bounds$/
+      call cursor(v:lnum,1)
+    endtry
+    let b:js_cache[1:] = line('.') == v:lnum ? [0,0] : getpos('.')[1:2]
   endif
 
-  let b:js_cache = [v:lnum] + (line('.') == v:lnum ? [0,0] : getpos('.')[1:2])
+  let [b:js_cache[0], num] = [v:lnum, b:js_cache[1]]
-  let num = b:js_cache[1]
 
-  let [s:W, isOp, bL, switch_offset] = [s:sw(),0,0,0]
+  let [num_ind, is_op, b_l, l:switch_offset] = [s:Nat(indent(num)),0,0,0]
-  if !num || s:IsBlock()
+  if !num || s:LookingAt() == '{' && s:IsBlock()
     let ilnum = line('.')
-    let pline = s:save_pos('s:Trim',l:lnum)
+    if num && s:LookingAt() == ')' && s:GetPair('(',')','bW',s:skip_expr)
-    if num && s:looking_at() == ')' && s:GetPair('(', ')', 'bW', s:skip_expr, 100) > 0
+      if ilnum == num
-      let num = ilnum == num ? line('.') : num
+        let [num, num_ind] = [line('.'), indent('.')]
-      if idx < 0 && s:previous_token() ==# 'switch' && s:previous_token() != '.'
+      endif
-        if &cino !~ ':'
+      if idx == -1 && s:PreviousToken() ==# 'switch' && s:IsSwitch()
-          let switch_offset = s:W
+        let l:switch_offset = &cino !~ ':' ? s:sw() : s:ParseCino(':')
-        else
-          let switch_offset = max([-indent(num),s:parse_cino(':')])
-        endif
         if pline[-1:] != '.' && l:line =~# '^\%(default\|case\)\>'
-          return indent(num) + switch_offset
+          return s:Nat(num_ind + l:switch_offset)
+        elseif &cino =~ '='
+          let l:case_offset = s:ParseCino('=')
         endif
       endif
     endif
-    if idx < 0 && pline[-1:] !~ '[{;]'
+    if idx == -1 && pline[-1:] !~ '[{;]'
-      let isOp = (l:line =~# s:opfirst || s:continues(l:lnum,pline)) * s:W
+      let sol = matchstr(l:line,s:opfirst)
-      let bL = s:iscontOne(l:lnum,b:js_cache[1],isOp)
+      if sol is '' || sol == '/' && s:SynAt(v:lnum,
-      let bL -= (bL && l:line[0] == '{') * s:W
+            \ 1 + len(getline(v:lnum)) - len(l:line)) =~? 'regex'
+        if s:Continues(l:lnum,pline)
+          let is_op = s:sw()
+        endif
+      elseif num && sol =~# '^\%(in\%(stanceof\)\=\|\*\)$'
+        call call('cursor',b:js_cache[1:])
+        if s:PreviousToken() =~ '\k' && s:Class()
+          return num_ind + s:sw()
+        endif
+        let is_op = s:sw()
+      else
+        let is_op = s:sw()
+      endif
+      call cursor(l:lnum, len(pline))
+      let b_l = s:Nat(s:IsContOne(b:js_cache[1],is_op) - (!is_op && l:line =~ '^{')) * s:sw()
     endif
-  elseif idx < 0 && getline(b:js_cache[1])[b:js_cache[2]-1] == '(' && &cino =~ '('
+  elseif idx.s:LookingAt().&cino =~ '^-1(.*(' && (search('\m\S','nbW',num) || s:ParseCino('U'))
-    let pval = s:parse_cino('(')
+    let pval = s:ParseCino('(')
-    return !pval ? (s:parse_cino('w') ? 0 : -(!!search('\m\S','W'.s:z,num))) + virtcol('.') :
+    if !pval
-          \ max([indent('.') + pval + (s:GetPair('(',')','nbrmW',s:skip_expr,100,num) * s:W),0])
+      let [Wval, vcol] = [s:ParseCino('W'), virtcol('.')]
+      if search('\m\S','W',num)
+        return s:ParseCino('w') ? vcol : virtcol('.')-1
+      endif
+      return Wval ? s:Nat(num_ind + Wval) : vcol
+    endif
+    return s:Nat(num_ind + pval + searchpair('\m(','','\m)','nbrmW',s:skip_expr,num) * s:sw())
   endif
 
   " main return
-  if l:line =~ '^\%([])}]\||}\)'
+  if l:line =~ '^[])}]\|^|}'
-    return max([indent(num),0])
+    if l:line_raw[0] == ')' && getline(num)[b:js_cache[2]-1] == '('
+      if s:ParseCino('M')
+        return indent(l:lnum)
+      elseif &cino =~# 'm' && !s:ParseCino('m')
+        return virtcol('.') - 1
+      endif
+    endif
+    return num_ind
   elseif num
-    return indent(num) + s:W + switch_offset + bL + isOp
+    return s:Nat(num_ind + get(l:,'case_offset',s:sw()) + l:switch_offset + b_l + is_op)
   endif
-  return bL + isOp
+  return b_l + is_op
 endfunction
 
 let &cpo = s:cpo_save

runtime/indent/json.vim

@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
 " Vim indent file
 " Language:		JSON
 " Mantainer:		Eli Parra <eli@elzr.com> https://github.com/elzr/vim-json
-" Last Change:          2014 Aug 29
+" Last Change:          2017 Jun 13
 "   https://github.com/jakar/vim-json/commit/20b650e22aa750c4ab6a66aa646bdd95d7cd548a#diff-e81fc111b2052e306d126bd9989f7b7c
 " Original Author:	Rogerz Zhang <rogerz.zhang at gmail.com> http://github.com/rogerz/vim-json
 " Acknowledgement:      Based off of vim-javascript maintained by Darrick Wiebe 
@@ -141,7 +141,7 @@ function GetJSONIndent()
 
   " If the previous line ended with a block opening, add a level of indent.
   " if s:Match(lnum, s:block_regex)
-    " return indent(lnum) + &sw
+    " return indent(lnum) + shiftwidth()
   " endif
 
   " If the previous line contained an opening bracket, and we are still in it,
@@ -149,7 +149,7 @@ function GetJSONIndent()
   if line =~ '[[({]'
     let counts = s:LineHasOpeningBrackets(lnum)
     if counts[0] == '1' || counts[1] == '1' || counts[2] == '1'
-      return ind + &sw
+      return ind + shiftwidth()
     else
       call cursor(v:lnum, vcol)
     end

runtime/indent/liquid.vim

@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
 " Vim indent file
 " Language:     Liquid
 " Maintainer:   Tim Pope <vimNOSPAM@tpope.org>
-" Last Change:	2016 Aug 29
+" Last Change:	2017 Jun 13
 
 if exists('b:did_indent')
   finish
@@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ function! GetLiquidIndent(...)
   let line  = substitute(line,'\C^\%(\s*{%\s*end\w*\s*%}\)\+','','')
   let line .= matchstr(cline,'\C^\%(\s*{%\s*end\w*\s*%}\)\+')
   let cline = substitute(cline,'\C^\%(\s*{%\s*end\w*\s*%}\)\+','','')
-  let sw = exists('*shiftwidth') ? shiftwidth() : &sw
+  let sw = shiftwidth()
   let ind += sw * s:count(line,'{%\s*\%(if\|elsif\|else\|unless\|ifchanged\|case\|when\|for\|empty\|tablerow\|capture\)\>')
   let ind -= sw * s:count(line,'{%\s*end\%(if\|unless\|ifchanged\|case\|for\|tablerow\|capture\)\>')
   let ind -= sw * s:count(cline,'{%\s*\%(elsif\|else\|when\|empty\)\>')

runtime/indent/logtalk.vim

@@ -38,24 +38,24 @@ function! GetLogtalkIndent()
 	endif
 	" Check for entity opening directive on previous line
 	if pline =~ '^\s*:-\s\(object\|protocol\|category\)\ze(.*,$'
-		let ind = ind + &sw
+		let ind = ind + shiftwidth()
 	" Check for clause head on previous line
 	elseif pline =~ ':-\s*\(%.*\)\?$'
-		let ind = ind + &sw
+		let ind = ind + shiftwidth()
 	" Check for entity closing directive on previous line
 	elseif pline =~ '^\s*:-\send_\(object\|protocol\|category\)\.\(%.*\)\?$'
-		let ind = ind - &sw
+		let ind = ind - shiftwidth()
 	" Check for end of clause on previous line
 	elseif pline =~ '\.\s*\(%.*\)\?$'
-		let ind = ind - &sw
+		let ind = ind - shiftwidth()
 	endif
 	" Check for opening conditional on previous line
 	if pline =~ '^\s*\([(;]\|->\)' && pline !~ '\.\s*\(%.*\)\?$' && pline !~ '^.*\([)][,]\s*\(%.*\)\?$\)'
-		let ind = ind + &sw
+		let ind = ind + shiftwidth()
 	endif
 	" Check for closing an unclosed paren, or middle ; or ->
 	if line =~ '^\s*\([);]\|->\)'
-		let ind = ind - &sw
+		let ind = ind - shiftwidth()
 	endif
 	return ind
 endfunction

runtime/indent/lua.vim

@@ -2,7 +2,7 @@
 " Language:	Lua script
 " Maintainer:	Marcus Aurelius Farias <marcus.cf 'at' bol.com.br>
 " First Author:	Max Ischenko <mfi 'at' ukr.net>
-" Last Change:	2016 Jan 10
+" Last Change:	2017 Jun 13
 
 " Only load this indent file when no other was loaded.
 if exists("b:did_indent")
@@ -48,7 +48,7 @@ function! GetLuaIndent()
     " Add 'shiftwidth' if what we found previously is not in a comment and
     " an "end" or "until" is not present on the same line.
     if synIDattr(synID(prevlnum, midx + 1, 1), "name") != "luaComment" && prevline !~ '\<end\>\|\<until\>'
-      let ind = ind + &shiftwidth
+      let ind = ind + shiftwidth()
     endif
   endif
 
@@ -56,7 +56,7 @@ function! GetLuaIndent()
   " This is the part that requires 'indentkeys'.
   let midx = match(getline(v:lnum), '^\s*\%(end\>\|else\>\|elseif\>\|until\>\|}\)')
   if midx != -1 && synIDattr(synID(v:lnum, midx + 1, 1), "name") != "luaComment"
-    let ind = ind - &shiftwidth
+    let ind = ind - shiftwidth()
   endif
 
   return ind

runtime/indent/matlab.vim

@@ -44,9 +44,9 @@ function GetMatlabIndent(lnum)
     " See if this line does not follow the line right after an openblock
     if getline(plnum) =~ '^\s*\(for\|if\|else\|elseif\|case\|while\|switch\|try\|otherwise\|catch\)\>'
     " See if the user has already dedented
-    elseif indent(v:lnum) > curind - &sw
+    elseif indent(v:lnum) > curind - shiftwidth()
       " If not, recommend one dedent
-	let curind = curind - &sw
+	let curind = curind - shiftwidth()
     else
       " Otherwise, trust the user
       return -1
@@ -56,9 +56,9 @@ function GetMatlabIndent(lnum)
   " If the previous line opened a block
   elseif getline(plnum) =~ '^\s*\(for\|if\|else\|elseif\|case\|while\|switch\|try\|otherwise\|catch\)\>'
     " See if the user has already indented
-    if indent(v:lnum) < curind + &sw
+    if indent(v:lnum) < curind + shiftwidth()
       "If not, recommend indent
-      let curind = curind + &sw
+      let curind = curind + shiftwidth()
     else
       " Otherwise, trust the user
       return -1

runtime/indent/mma.vim

@@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ function GetMmaIndent()
     " also, indent only if this line if this line isn't starting a new
     " block... TODO - fix this with indentkeys?
     if getline(v:lnum-1) =~ '\\\@<!\%(\[[^\]]*\|([^)]*\|{[^}]*\)$' && getline(v:lnum) !~ '\s\+[\[({]'
-        let ind = ind+&sw
+        let ind = ind+shiftwidth()
     endif
 
     " if this line had unmatched closing block,

runtime/indent/ocaml.vim

@@ -4,7 +4,7 @@
 "               Mike Leary           <leary@nwlink.com>
 "               Markus Mottl         <markus.mottl@gmail.com>
 " URL:          http://www.ocaml.info/vim/indent/ocaml.vim
-" Last Change:  2013 Jun 29
+" Last Change:  2017 Jun 13
 "               2005 Jun 25 - Fixed multiple bugs due to 'else\nreturn ind' working
 "               2005 May 09 - Added an option to not indent OCaml-indents specially (MM)
 "               2013 June   - commented textwidth (Marc Weber)
@@ -101,7 +101,7 @@ function! GetOCamlIndent()
 
  " Return double 'shiftwidth' after lines matching:
  if lline =~ '^\s*|.*->\s*$'
-   return ind + &sw + &sw
+   return ind + 2 * shiftwidth()
  endif
 
  let line = getline(v:lnum)
@@ -172,7 +172,7 @@ function! GetOCamlIndent()
  " Indent if current line begins with 'and':
  elseif line =~ '^\s*and\>'
    if lline !~ '^\s*\(and\|let\|type\)\>\|\<end\s*$'
-     return ind - &sw
+     return ind - shiftwidth()
    endif
 
  " Indent if current line begins with 'with':
@@ -199,14 +199,14 @@ function! GetOCamlIndent()
  " or 'method':
  elseif line =~ '^\s*\(constraint\|inherit\|initializer\|method\)\>'
    if lline !~ s:obj
-     return indent(search('\<\(object\|object\s*(.*)\)\s*$', 'bW')) + &sw
+     return indent(search('\<\(object\|object\s*(.*)\)\s*$', 'bW')) + shiftwidth()
    endif
 
  endif
 
  " Add a 'shiftwidth' after lines ending with:
  if lline =~ '\(:\|=\|->\|<-\|(\|\[\|{\|{<\|\[|\|\[<\|\<\(begin\|do\|else\|fun\|function\|functor\|if\|initializer\|object\|parser\|private\|sig\|struct\|then\|try\)\|\<object\s*(.*)\)\s*$'
-   let ind = ind + &sw
+   let ind = ind + shiftwidth()
 
  " Back to normal indent after lines ending with ';;':
  elseif lline =~ ';;\s*$' && lline !~ '^\s*;;'
@@ -263,7 +263,7 @@ function! GetOCamlIndent()
 
  " Subtract a 'shiftwidth' after lines matching 'match ... with parser':
  if lline =~ '\<match\>.*\<with\>\s*\<parser\s*$'
-   let ind = ind - &sw
+   let ind = ind - shiftwidth()
  endif
 
  return ind

runtime/indent/occam.vim

@@ -131,7 +131,7 @@ function GetOccamIndent()
   if line =~ s:FirstLevelIndent || (line =~ s:FirstLevelNonColonEndIndent && line !~ s:ColonEnd)
 	\ || (line !~ s:ColonStart && (prevline =~ s:SecondLevelIndent
 	\ || (prevline =~ s:SecondLevelNonColonEndIndent && prevline !~ s:ColonEnd)))
-    let curindent = curindent + &shiftwidth
+    let curindent = curindent + shiftwidth()
 
     " Restore magic
     if !save_magic|setlocal nomagic|endif
@@ -153,7 +153,7 @@ function GetOccamIndent()
 
   while !found
 
-    if indent(prevlinenum) == curindent - &shiftwidth
+    if indent(prevlinenum) == curindent - shiftwidth()
       let found = 1
     endif
 
@@ -171,7 +171,7 @@ function GetOccamIndent()
 
   if prevlinenum > 0
     if getline(prevlinenum) =~ s:SecondLevelIndent
-      let curindent = curindent + &shiftwidth
+      let curindent = curindent + shiftwidth()
     endif
   endif
 

runtime/indent/pascal.vim

@@ -2,7 +2,7 @@
 " Language:    Pascal
 " Maintainer:  Neil Carter <n.carter@swansea.ac.uk>
 " Created:     2004 Jul 13
-" Last Change: 2011 Apr 01
+" Last Change: 2017 Jun 13
 "
 " This is version 2.0, a complete rewrite.
 "
@@ -102,12 +102,12 @@ function! GetPascalIndent( line_num )
 
 	" If the PREVIOUS LINE ended in these items, always indent
 	if prev_codeline =~ '\<\(type\|const\|var\)$'
-		return indnt + &shiftwidth
+		return indnt + shiftwidth()
 	endif
 
 	if prev_codeline =~ '\<repeat$'
 		if this_codeline !~ '^\s*until\>'
-			return indnt + &shiftwidth
+			return indnt + shiftwidth()
 		else
 			return indnt
 		endif
@@ -115,7 +115,7 @@ function! GetPascalIndent( line_num )
 
 	if prev_codeline =~ '\<\(begin\|record\)$'
 		if this_codeline !~ '^\s*end\>'
-			return indnt + &shiftwidth
+			return indnt + shiftwidth()
 		else
 			return indnt
 		endif
@@ -125,10 +125,10 @@ function! GetPascalIndent( line_num )
 	" followed by "begin"
 	if prev_codeline =~ '\<\(\|else\|then\|do\)$' || prev_codeline =~ ':$'
 		if this_codeline !~ '^\s*begin\>'
-			return indnt + &shiftwidth
+			return indnt + shiftwidth()
 		else
 			" If it does start with "begin" then keep the same indent
-			"return indnt + &shiftwidth
+			"return indnt + shiftwidth()
 			return indnt
 		endif
 	endif
@@ -137,7 +137,7 @@ function! GetPascalIndent( line_num )
 	" only the line before the current one. TODO: Get it working for
 	" parameter lists longer than two lines.
 	if prev_codeline =~ '([^)]\+$'
-		return indnt + &shiftwidth
+		return indnt + shiftwidth()
 	endif
 
 
@@ -146,7 +146,7 @@ function! GetPascalIndent( line_num )
 	" Lines starting with "else", but not following line ending with
 	" "end".
 	if this_codeline =~ '^\s*else\>' && prev_codeline !~ '\<end$'
-		return indnt - &shiftwidth
+		return indnt - shiftwidth()
 	endif
 
 	" Lines after a single-statement branch/loop.
@@ -160,16 +160,16 @@ function! GetPascalIndent( line_num )
 		" additional unindentation.
 		if this_codeline =~ '^\s*\(end;\|except\|finally\|\)$'
 			" Note that we don't return from here.
-			return indnt - &shiftwidth - &shiftwidth
+			return indnt - 2 * shiftwidth()
 		endif
-		return indnt - &shiftwidth
+		return indnt - shiftwidth()
 	endif
 
 	" Lines starting with "until" or "end". This rule must be overridden
 	" by the one for "end" after a single-statement branch/loop. In
 	" other words that rule should come before this one.
 	if this_codeline =~ '^\s*\(end\|until\)\>'
-		return indnt - &shiftwidth
+		return indnt - shiftwidth()
 	endif
 
 
@@ -201,7 +201,7 @@ function! GetPascalIndent( line_num )
 
 	" If the PREVIOUS LINE ended in these items, always indent.
 	if prev_codeline =~ '^\s*\(unit\|uses\|try\|except\|finally\|private\|protected\|public\|published\)$'
-		return indnt + &shiftwidth
+		return indnt + shiftwidth()
 	endif
 
 	" ???? Indent "procedure" and "functions" if they appear within an
@@ -212,11 +212,11 @@ function! GetPascalIndent( line_num )
 	" UNINDENT ONCE
 
 	if this_codeline =~ '^\s*\(except\|finally\)$'
-		return indnt - &shiftwidth
+		return indnt - shiftwidth()
 	endif
 
 	if this_codeline =~ '^\s*\(private\|protected\|public\|published\)$'
-		return indnt - &shiftwidth
+		return indnt - shiftwidth()
 	endif
 
 

runtime/indent/perl.vim

@@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
 " Maintainer:    vim-perl <vim-perl@googlegroups.com>
 " Homepage:      http://github.com/vim-perl/vim-perl
 " Bugs/requests: http://github.com/vim-perl/vim-perl/issues
-" Last Change:   2013-07-24
+" Last Change:   2017-01-04
 
 " Suggestions and improvements by :
 "   Aaron J. Sherman (use syntax for hints)
@@ -48,11 +48,6 @@ function! GetPerlIndent()
         return 0
     endif
 
-    " Don't reindent comments on first column
-    if cline =~ '^#.'
-        return 0
-    endif
-
     " Get current syntax item at the line's first char
     let csynid = ''
     if b:indent_use_syntax
@@ -134,13 +129,14 @@ function! GetPerlIndent()
                         \ || synid == "perlMatchStartEnd"
                         \ || synid == "perlHereDoc"
                         \ || synid == "perlBraces"
+                        \ || synid == "perlStatementIndirObj"
                         \ || synid =~ "^perlFiledescStatement"
                         \ || synid =~ '^perl\(Sub\|Block\|Package\)Fold'
                 let brace = strpart(line, bracepos, 1)
                 if brace == '(' || brace == '{' || brace == '['
-                    let ind = ind + &sw
+                    let ind = ind + shiftwidth()
                 else
-                    let ind = ind - &sw
+                    let ind = ind - shiftwidth()
                 endif
             endif
             let bracepos = match(line, braceclass, bracepos + 1)
@@ -151,26 +147,27 @@ function! GetPerlIndent()
             if synid == ""
                         \ || synid == "perlMatchStartEnd"
                         \ || synid == "perlBraces"
+                        \ || synid == "perlStatementIndirObj"
                         \ || synid =~ '^perl\(Sub\|Block\|Package\)Fold'
-                let ind = ind - &sw
+                let ind = ind - shiftwidth()
             endif
         endif
     else
         if line =~ '[{[(]\s*\(#[^])}]*\)\=$'
-            let ind = ind + &sw
+            let ind = ind + shiftwidth()
         endif
         if cline =~ '^\s*[])}]'
-            let ind = ind - &sw
+            let ind = ind - shiftwidth()
         endif
     endif
 
     " Indent lines that begin with 'or' or 'and'
     if cline =~ '^\s*\(or\|and\)\>'
         if line !~ '^\s*\(or\|and\)\>'
-            let ind = ind + &sw
+            let ind = ind + shiftwidth()
         endif
     elseif line =~ '^\s*\(or\|and\)\>'
-        let ind = ind - &sw
+        let ind = ind - shiftwidth()
     endif
 
     return ind

runtime/indent/perl6.vim

@@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
 " Maintainer:    vim-perl <vim-perl@googlegroups.com>
 " Homepage:      http://github.com/vim-perl/vim-perl
 " Bugs/requests: http://github.com/vim-perl/vim-perl/issues
-" Last Change:   2013-07-21
+" Last Change:   2017 Jun 13
 " Contributors:  Andy Lester <andy@petdance.com>
 "                Hinrik Örn Sigurðsson <hinrik.sig@gmail.com>
 "
@@ -107,19 +107,19 @@ function! GetPerl6Indent()
     endif
 
         if line =~ '[<«\[{(]\s*\(#[^)}\]»>]*\)\=$'
-            let ind = ind + &sw
+            let ind = ind + shiftwidth()
         endif
         if cline =~ '^\s*[)}\]»>]'
-            let ind = ind - &sw
+            let ind = ind - shiftwidth()
         endif
 
     " Indent lines that begin with 'or' or 'and'
     if cline =~ '^\s*\(or\|and\)\>'
         if line !~ '^\s*\(or\|and\)\>'
-            let ind = ind + &sw
+            let ind = ind + shiftwidth()
         endif
     elseif line =~ '^\s*\(or\|and\)\>'
-        let ind = ind - &sw
+        let ind = ind - shiftwidth()
     endif
 
     return ind

runtime/indent/php.vim

@@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
 " Author:	John Wellesz <John.wellesz (AT) teaser (DOT) fr>
 " URL:		http://www.2072productions.com/vim/indent/php.vim
 " Home:		https://github.com/2072/PHP-Indenting-for-VIm
-" Last Change:	2017 March 12th
+" Last Change:	2017 Jun 13
 " Version:	1.62
 "
 "
@@ -50,25 +50,15 @@ let b:did_indent = 1
 
 let g:php_sync_method = 0
 
-if exists('*shiftwidth')
-  function! s:sw()
-    return shiftwidth()
-  endfunction
-else
-  function! s:sw()
-    return &shiftwidth
-  endfunction
-endif
-
 
 if exists("PHP_default_indenting")
-    let b:PHP_default_indenting = PHP_default_indenting * s:sw()
+    let b:PHP_default_indenting = PHP_default_indenting * shiftwidth()
 else
     let b:PHP_default_indenting = 0
 endif
 
 if exists("PHP_outdentSLComments")
-    let b:PHP_outdentSLComments = PHP_outdentSLComments * s:sw()
+    let b:PHP_outdentSLComments = PHP_outdentSLComments * shiftwidth()
 else
     let b:PHP_outdentSLComments = 0
 endif
@@ -357,7 +347,7 @@ function! FindTheSwitchIndent (lnum) " {{{
     let test = GetLastRealCodeLNum(a:lnum - 1)
 
     if test <= 1
-	return indent(1) - s:sw() * b:PHP_vintage_case_default_indent
+	return indent(1) - shiftwidth() * b:PHP_vintage_case_default_indent
     end
 
     while getline(test) =~ '^\s*}' && test > 1
@@ -371,7 +361,7 @@ function! FindTheSwitchIndent (lnum) " {{{
     if getline(test) =~# '^\s*switch\>'
 	return indent(test)
     elseif getline(test) =~# s:defaultORcase
-	return indent(test) - s:sw() * b:PHP_vintage_case_default_indent
+	return indent(test) - shiftwidth() * b:PHP_vintage_case_default_indent
     else
 	return FindTheSwitchIndent(test)
     endif
@@ -444,7 +434,7 @@ function! GetPhpIndent()
     endif
 
     if b:PHP_default_indenting
-	let b:PHP_default_indenting = g:PHP_default_indenting * s:sw()
+	let b:PHP_default_indenting = g:PHP_default_indenting * shiftwidth()
     endif
 
     let cline = getline(v:lnum)
@@ -701,7 +691,7 @@ function! GetPhpIndent()
 	let b:PHP_CurrentIndentLevel = b:PHP_default_indenting
 	return indent(FindTheIfOfAnElse(v:lnum, 1))
     elseif cline =~# s:defaultORcase
-	return FindTheSwitchIndent(v:lnum) + s:sw() * b:PHP_vintage_case_default_indent
+	return FindTheSwitchIndent(v:lnum) + shiftwidth() * b:PHP_vintage_case_default_indent
     elseif cline =~ '^\s*)\=\s*{'
 	let previous_line = last_line
 	let last_line_num = lnum
@@ -713,7 +703,7 @@ function! GetPhpIndent()
 		let ind = indent(last_line_num)
 
 		if  b:PHP_BracesAtCodeLevel
-		    let ind = ind + s:sw()
+		    let ind = ind + shiftwidth()
 		endif
 
 		return ind
@@ -724,7 +714,7 @@ function! GetPhpIndent()
 	endwhile
 
     elseif last_line =~# unstated && cline !~ '^\s*);\='.endline
-	let ind = ind + s:sw() " we indent one level further when the preceding line is not stated
+	let ind = ind + shiftwidth() " we indent one level further when the preceding line is not stated
 	return ind + addSpecial
 
     elseif (ind != b:PHP_default_indenting || last_line =~ '^[)\]]' ) && last_line =~ terminated
@@ -823,7 +813,7 @@ function! GetPhpIndent()
 	    endif
 
 	    if !dontIndent && (!b:PHP_BracesAtCodeLevel || last_line !~# '^\s*{')
-		let ind = ind + s:sw()
+		let ind = ind + shiftwidth()
 	    endif
 
 	    if b:PHP_BracesAtCodeLevel || b:PHP_vintage_case_default_indent == 1
@@ -841,17 +831,17 @@ function! GetPhpIndent()
 	    endif
 
 	elseif last_line =~ '^\s*'.s:blockstart
-	    let ind = ind + s:sw()
+	    let ind = ind + shiftwidth()
 
 
 	elseif AntepenultimateLine =~ '{'.endline && AntepenultimateLine !~? '^\s*use\>' || AntepenultimateLine =~ terminated || AntepenultimateLine =~# s:defaultORcase
-	    let ind = ind + s:sw()
+	    let ind = ind + shiftwidth()
 	endif
 
     endif
 
     if cline =~  '^\s*[)\]];\='
-	let ind = ind - s:sw()
+	let ind = ind - shiftwidth()
     endif
 
     let b:PHP_CurrentIndentLevel = ind

runtime/indent/postscr.vim

@@ -41,16 +41,16 @@ function! PostscrIndentGet(lnum)
 
   " Indent for dicts, arrays, and saves with possible trailing comment
   if pline =~ '\(begin\|<<\|g\=save\|{\|[\)\s*\(%.*\)\=$'
-    let ind = ind + &sw
+    let ind = ind + shiftwidth()
   endif
 
   " Remove indent for popped dicts, and restores.
   if pline =~ '\(end\|g\=restore\)\s*$'
-    let ind = ind - &sw
+    let ind = ind - shiftwidth()
 
   " Else handle immediate dedents of dicts, restores, and arrays.
   elseif getline(a:lnum) =~ '\(end\|>>\|g\=restore\|}\|]\)'
-    let ind = ind - &sw
+    let ind = ind - shiftwidth()
 
   " Else handle DSC comments - always start of line.
   elseif getline(a:lnum) =~ '^\s*%%'

runtime/indent/pov.vim

@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
 " Vim indent file
 " Language: PoV-Ray Scene Description Language
 " Maintainer: David Necas (Yeti) <yeti@physics.muni.cz>
-" Last Change: 2002-10-20
+" Last Change: 2017 Jun 13
 " URI: http://trific.ath.cx/Ftp/vim/indent/pov.vim
 
 " Only load this indent file when no other was loaded.
@@ -75,9 +75,9 @@ function GetPoVRayIndent()
   " opening line.
   let cur = s:MatchCount(v:lnum, '^\s*\%(#\s*\%(end\|else\)\>\|[]})]\)')
   if cur > 0
-    let final = plind + (chg - cur) * &sw
+    let final = plind + (chg - cur) * shiftwidth()
   else
-    let final = plind + chg * &sw
+    let final = plind + chg * shiftwidth()
   endif
 
   return final < 0 ? 0 : final

runtime/indent/prolog.vim

@@ -41,18 +41,18 @@ function! GetPrologIndent()
     endif
     " Check for clause head on previous line
     if pline =~ ':-\s*\(%.*\)\?$'
-	let ind = ind + &sw
+	let ind = ind + shiftwidth()
     " Check for end of clause on previous line
     elseif pline =~ '\.\s*\(%.*\)\?$'
-	let ind = ind - &sw
+	let ind = ind - shiftwidth()
     endif
     " Check for opening conditional on previous line
     if pline =~ '^\s*\([(;]\|->\)'
-	let ind = ind + &sw
+	let ind = ind + shiftwidth()
     endif
     " Check for closing an unclosed paren, or middle ; or ->
     if line =~ '^\s*\([);]\|->\)'
-	let ind = ind - &sw
+	let ind = ind - shiftwidth()
     endif
     return ind
 endfunction

runtime/indent/rpl.vim

@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
 " Vim indent file
 " Language:	RPL/2
 " Version:	0.2
-" Last Change:	2005 Mar 28
+" Last Change:	2017 Jun 13
 " Maintainer:	BERTRAND Jo<4A>l <rpl2@free.fr>
 
 " Only load this indent file when no other was loaded.
@@ -32,16 +32,16 @@ function RplGetIndent(lnum)
   if prevstat =~? '\<\(if\|iferr\|do\|while\)\>' && prevstat =~? '\<end\>'
   elseif prevstat =~? '\(^\|\s\+\)<<\($\|\s\+\)' && prevstat =~? '\s\+>>\($\|\s\+\)'
   elseif prevstat =~? '\<\(if\|iferr\|then\|else\|elseif\|select\|case\|do\|until\|while\|repeat\|for\|start\|default\)\>' || prevstat =~? '\(^\|\s\+\)<<\($\|\s\+\)'
-    let ind = ind + &sw
+    let ind = ind + shiftwidth()
   endif
 
   " Subtract a shiftwidth from then, else, elseif, end, until, repeat, next,
   " step
   let line = getline(v:lnum)
   if line =~? '^\s*\(then\|else\|elseif\|until\|repeat\|next\|step\|default\|end\)\>'
-    let ind = ind - &sw
+    let ind = ind - shiftwidth()
   elseif line =~? '^\s*>>\($\|\s\+\)'
-    let ind = ind - &sw
+    let ind = ind - shiftwidth()
   endif
 
   return ind

runtime/indent/ruby.vim

@@ -404,11 +404,7 @@ function GetRubyIndent(...)
   " ----------
 
   " The value of a single shift-width
-  if exists('*shiftwidth')
+  let sw = shiftwidth()
-    let sw = shiftwidth()
-  else
-    let sw = &sw
-  endif
 
   " For the current line, use the first argument if given, else v:lnum
   let clnum = a:0 ? a:1 : v:lnum